OWNER’S MANUAL
Fourth Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
18JK-126-AD
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2018
Wrangler JK
2018
Wrangler JK
DID_3636160_18d_Jeep_Wrangler_OM_EN_070318.indd 1 7/3/2018 9:23:33 AM
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
DID_3636160_18d_Jeep_Wrangler_OM_EN_070318.indd 2 7/3/2018 9:23:33 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................177
5
SAFETY ........................................................................203
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................273
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................333
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................361
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................429
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................439
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................493
12
INDEX..........................................................................499
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION .........................4
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING .....................5
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............6
▫ Essential Information ......................6
▫ Symbols ...............................6
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................6
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .....6
1
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that are not intended for conventional pas-
senger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so
take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If
equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was
designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for
off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for
a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this
vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar
with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for brak-
ing, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting.
Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces.
Your driving skills will improve with experience. When
driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the
vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws
of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and
local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of
this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer
oriented documents. In the attached Warranty Booklet you
will find a description of the services that FCA offers to its
customers, the Warranty Certificate and the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please
take the time to read all of these publications carefully
before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warn-
ings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable
operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
4 INTRODUCTION
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
If applicable, refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for
related information.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
1
INTRODUCTION 5
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
6 INTRODUCTION
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Door 4 — Rear View Mirror
2 — Exterior Mirror 5 — Hood/Engine Compartment
3 — Wheel/Tire 6 — Headlight
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Light
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper — If Equipped
3 — Swing Gate
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Outlets 7 — Power Outlet
2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Climate Controls
3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank
4 — Power Window Switches 10 — Power Mirror Switch — If Equipped
5 — Assist Handle 11 — Horn
6 — Glove Compartment
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Seats 5 — Switch Panel
2 — Power Window Switches 6 — Transmission Gear Selector
3 — Radio
4 — Climate Controls
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYFOB ..............................17
▫ KeyFob..............................17
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................19
▫ Ignition Key Removal ....................19
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .20
▫ How To Use Remote Start..................21
▫ Remote Start Abort Message ...............21
▫ To Enter Remote Start ....................22
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ...............................22
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................22
▫ General Information .....................23
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................23
▫ Replacement Key Fobs ...................24
▫ Customer Key Programming ...............24
▫ General Information .....................25
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .25
▫ Rearming The System ....................26
▫ To Arm The System .....................26
▫ To Disarm The System ...................26
䡵 DOORS ...............................27
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................27
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ...........29
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors ...............................29
▫ Upper Half Door Window Removal — If
Equipped .............................30
▫ Front Door Removal .....................31
▫ Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) .......33
3
䡵 SEATS ................................36
▫ Manual Front Seats ......................36
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ...............38
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door
Models ..............................38
▫ Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two Door
Models ..............................40
▫ Tip ‘n Slide Seats — Two Door Models ........41
▫ Removing The Rear Seat — Two Door Models . .44
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................45
▫ Front Head Restraints ....................46
▫ Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Model ......47
▫ Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Model ......47
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................48
▫ Tilt Steering Column .....................48
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................49
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......49
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....49
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................50
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..............51
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............51
▫ Vanity Mirrors .........................51
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................52
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights .............52
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .......52
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ..................52
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................52
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........52
▫ Front Fog Lights ........................53
▫ Turn Signals ...........................53
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ..........54
▫ Lights-On Reminder......................54
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................54
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ..................54
▫ Cargo Lamp ...........................55
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........56
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation................56
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped ....58
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................59
▫ Manual Climate Control Overview ...........59
▫ Automatic Climate Control Overview .........63
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped .............................67
▫ Operating Tips .........................67
䡵 POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ..........70
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................71
䡵 DUAL TOP — TWO DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED .............................71
▫ Removing The Soft Top — Two Door Models ....71
▫ Installing The Soft Top — Two Door Models ....72
䡵 DUAL TOP — FOUR DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED .............................74
▫ Removing The Soft Top — Four Door Models . . .75
▫ Installing The Soft Top — Four Door Models ....78
䡵 FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD
TOP — IF EQUIPPED .....................81
▫ Front Panel(s) Removal ...................82
▫ Freedom Top Storage Bag ..................84
▫ Front Panel(s) Installation ..................87
▫ Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top
Removed .............................88
▫ Rear Hard Top Removal ..................88
▫ Rear Hard Top Installation .................91
䡵 DOOR FRAME...........................92
▫ Door Frame Removal .....................92
▫ Door Frame Installation — Two Door Models — If
Equipped .............................94
▫ Door Frame Installation — Four Door Models — If
Equipped .............................95
䡵 SOFT TOP — TWO DOOR MODELS ..........98
▫ Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top........100
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫ Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top .........104
▫ Lowering The Soft Top ...................109
▫ Raising The Soft Top.....................118
䡵 SUNRIDER (TWO DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................126
▫ Opening The Sunrider ...................127
▫ Closing The Sunrider ....................128
䡵 SOFT TOP — FOUR DOOR MODELS .........129
▫ Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top .......131
▫ Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top.........135
▫ Lowering The Soft Top ...................141
▫ Raising The Soft Top ....................151
䡵 SUNRIDER (FOUR DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................160
▫ Opening The Sunrider ...................160
▫ Closing The Sunrider ....................162
䡵 FOLDING WINDSHIELD ..................162
▫ Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side
Bars ................................164
▫ Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side
Bars ................................166
䡵 HOOD ...............................168
▫ Opening The Hood .....................168
▫ Closing The Hood ......................169
䡵 REAR SWING GATE .....................169
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..................170
▫ Storage ..............................170
▫ Cupholders ...........................172
▫ Electrical Power Outlets ..................172
▫ Power Inverter —
If Equipped .............176
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEY FOB
Your vehicle uses a key start ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob
with an ignition switch.
Key Fob
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: In the ON/RUN position, the lock button is dis-
abled. Only the unlock button is enabled.
Key Fob
1 — Remote Start Button — If Equipped
2 — Lock Button
3 — PANIC Button
4 — Unlock Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the key fob unlock button once to unlock
the driver’s door only, or twice to unlock all the doors and
swing gate. When the key fob unlock button is pushed, the
Illuminated Entry will initiate, and the turn signal lights
will flash twice.
To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signals will flash, and the horn will chirp
once to acknowledge the lock signal.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate .
1. With the key fob buttons facing down, use a flat blade
screwdriver to pry the two halves of the key fob apart.
Use extreme care not to damage the seal or internal
components.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
Separating Key Fob Halves
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to “Sentry Key” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory) posi-
tion.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to
the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, then turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al-
ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91
m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — Swing Gate Open
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
The instrument cluster display message stays active until
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Enter Remote Start
Push and release the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the remote start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
remote start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500.
• Any engine warning lamps come on.
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The transmission is moved out of PARK.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will
disable the one time push of the remote start button for two
seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then,
insert the key into the ignition and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses key fobs that have an embedded electronic
chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone
uses an invalid key to try to start the engine.
NOTE: A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition
or lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after placing the ignition in the
on position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the vehicle security light begins
to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used
an invalid key to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is
one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle key fobs with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid key fobs, you can program new key
fobs to the Sentry Key Immobilizer system by performing
the following procedure:
1. Cut the additional key(s) to match the ignition and lock
cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition. Place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, place the
ignition in the LOCK position and remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition. Place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position within 15 seconds.
After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In addition, the
Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash. Place the
ignition in the LOCK position and remove the second
key.
4. Insert a blank key into the ignition. Place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds, a single chime will sound. In addition, the
Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing. To indicate that
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
programming is complete, the Vehicle Security Light
will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off.
The new key is programmed. The key fob will also be
programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed key fob, contact your autho-
rized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key fob is lost, see your autho-
rized dealer to have all remaining key fobs erased from the
system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining key fobs must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle key fobs must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro-
grammed.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
swing gate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. While
the vehicle security alarm is armed, interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The vehicle security alarm pro-
vides both audible and visible signals when alarming. The
horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three
minutes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
for an additional 15 minutes.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE: The Panic Alarm and the vehicle security alarm are
quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic
Alarm and the vehicle security alarm to hear the differ-
ences in the horn. In case one should go off in the future,
you will need to know which mode has been activated in
order to deactivate it.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn off the horn
after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15
minutes, and then the vehicle security alarm will rearm
itself.
To Arm The System
The vehicle security alarm will set when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry key fob to lock the doors and swing
gate, or when you use the power door lock switch while
the door is open. After all the doors are locked and closed,
the vehicle security light (located on the instrument cluster)
will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the
vehicle security alarm is arming. During this 16-second
arming period, opening any door or the swing gate will
cancel the arming. If the vehicle security alarm is success-
fully set, the vehicle security light will flash at a slower rate
to indicate the vehicle security alarm is armed.
To Disarm The System
To disarm the vehicle security alarm, you will need to push
the unlock button on the key fob, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON/RUN position. If something has trig-
gered the vehicle security alarm in your absence, the horn
will sound three times, and the exterior lights blink three
times when you unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for
tampering.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
vehicle security alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you remain
in the vehicle and lock the doors with the key fob, once the
vehicle security alarm is armed (after 16 seconds), when
you pull the door handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, push the unlock button on the key fob to
disarm the vehicle security alarm. You may also acciden-
tally disarm the vehicle security alarm by unlocking the
driver’s door with the key and then locking it. The door
will be locked but the vehicle security alarm will not arm.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plung-
ers or the driver’s door lock cylinder will not disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
DOORS
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
Manual Door Locks
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door
lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, push
the rocker lever forward to the lock position and close the
door. To unlock the door, push the rocker lever rearward.
Manual Door Lock (Full Frame Doors)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE: The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle is
used to lock or unlock the doors, swing gate, glove
compartment, and console storage.
WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and exit the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Manual Door Lock (Half Doors)
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Push the switch forward to lock the doors, and
rearward to unlock the doors.
WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and exit the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
Power Door Lock Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate
to the lock or unlock position.
3. Repeat steps one and two for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the rocker lever rearward (unlocked position), roll down
the window and open the door with the outside door
handle.
Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped
Grasp the half door window and pull upward.
Child Protection Door Lock Function
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Upper Half Door Window Installation — If
Equipped
1. Grasp the half door window and line up the pins with
the pockets in the lower door.
2. Push down to ensure the half door window is fully
seated.
Front Door Removal
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection they can
provide. This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
NOTE: Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 10 N·m / 7.5 ft· lb).
Upper Half Door Window
Door Removal Warning Label
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.
3. Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instru-
ment panel by pushing the tab at the base of the
connector and pulling down to disconnect.
Hinge Pin Screw
Door Strap/Harness Location
1 — Wiring Harness (follow the harness up and under the instru-
ment panel to the connector)
2 — Body Hook
3 — Door/Harness Strap
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Unhook the door strap from the body hook. Be careful
not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror
may damage the paint.
5. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
from their hinges and remove the door.
NOTE: Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection they can
provide. This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
NOTE: Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 10 N·m / 7.5 ft· lb).
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the
rear cargo tray located under the rear load floor.
Door Removal Warning Label
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Remove the trim access door from the bottom of the
B-pillar.
5. Unplug the wiring harness connector.
NOTE: Squeeze the tab on the base of the connector. This
will unlock the connector tab, allowing the harness to be
disconnected.
Hinge Pin Screw Trim Access Door
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.
7. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
from their hinges and remove the door.
NOTE: Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
Connector Latched Connector Unplugged
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Front Seats
Front Seat Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under the
seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Adjusting Bar Location
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the
seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat, push
downward on the handle to lower the seat.
Front Seatback Recline
Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back to
the desired position and release the handle. Lift the handle
to return the seatback to an upright position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Seat Height Adjustment
Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may
be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near the
bottom center of the instrument panel.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for OFF.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LO-level
heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 30
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number
of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after approximately 30 minutes.
NOTE: When a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
To Fold Down The Rear Seat
Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat), and
lift it upward until the seatback releases.
Slowly fold down the seatback.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal. By simply
opening the seats to the open position, the seat cushion will
return to its normal shape over time.
Release Levers
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Raise The Rear Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If interference
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
NOTE: If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the center
shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use. If you
cannot extend the center shoulder belt, make sure your
seatback is fully latched.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two Door
Models
Pull upward on the recline lever (toward the rear of the
vehicle) and slide the entire seat forward.
Easy Entry Lever
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate the seatback
upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the
track locks.
NOTE:
• The front passenger seats have a track memory, which
returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the track
regardless of its original position.
• The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used
during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting
position.
Tip ‘n Slide Seats — Two Door Models
This feature allows the front seats to be rotated toward the
instrument panel to allow easier entry into the rear seats.
Easy Entry Seat
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Driver’s Seat
Pull upward on the recline lever and bring the seatback to
its full forward position.
Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the instrument
panel.
Recline Lever
Tip ‘n Slide
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Seat
In addition to Easy Entry, the front passenger seat is also
equipped with Tip ‘n Slide. This feature allows for easier
entry for rear passengers.
Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the entire seat
forward (Easy Entry).
With the seat forward, pull the entire seat assembly toward
the instrument panel.
Easy Entry Lever
Tip ‘n Slide
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Removing The Rear Seat — Two Door Models
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback
forward.
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in the forward
tumble position. The seat must be latched to all floor
attachments when the vehicle is in motion.
3. Push down on the release bar on each side, and pull the
seat out and away from the lower bracket.
4. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
Rear Seat Release
Folding Rear Seat
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure that the seats are fully
latched.
Replacing The Rear Seat — Two Door Models
Reverse the steps for removing the seat.
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the
rear seat folded down or removed from the vehicle.
• The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Release Bar Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then
push the adjustment button and the release button at the
base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
(Continued)
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Model
The rear seat head restraints are not adjustable. They can be
removed to make it easier to take out the rear seat. To
remove the head restraint, push the button on each of the
two head restraint guides and pull upward on the head
restraint. Replace the head restraint before driving the
vehicle with passengers in the rear seat. To replace the head
restraint, insert the head restraint rods into the guides and
push downward on the head restraint until locked. Refer to
“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for information
on child seat tether routing.
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head
restraints installed while passengers are occupying
the rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this area
without the head restraints installed are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Model
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head re-
straints. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for information on child seat tether routing.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering
column, below the turn signal lever.
To Adjust The Tilt Steering Column
1. Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
2. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired.
3. Pull upwards on the lever to lock the column firmly in
place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the
left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the
button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
There are also reading lights located at the bottom of the
mirror. Refer to “Courtesy/Reading Lights” in “Interior
Lights” for further information.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
passenger side mirror.
Outside Rearview Mirror
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located on the center of the
instrument panel, below the climate controls. A rotary knob
selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Vanity Mirrors
Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To use the
mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror
cover upward.
Power Mirror Switch
Vanity Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights come on at a low intensity level when
shifted into any position other than PARK (auto transmis-
sion) or when the vehicle begins to move (manual trans-
mission).
NOTE: The Daytime Running Light, on the same side of
the vehicle as the active turn signal, will turn off automati-
cally when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again
when the turn signal is not operating.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multi-
function lever back toward the steering wheel will return
the lights to low beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain
on, until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position (third detent). When the system is on, the Head-
light Time Delay feature is also on. This means the head-
lights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
Headlight Switch
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the Auto-
matic System off, turn the end of the multifunction lever
out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will turn on in the Automatic mode.
Front Fog Lights
The front fog light switch is located on the multi-
function lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the
end of the lever.
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking
lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam
headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Headlight Switch
Turn Signal Operation
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more
than 1 mile (2 km).
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Two courtesy/reading lights are located in the bottom of
the rearview mirror. You can turn these lights on and off
from the switches in the mirror or from the dimmer control
in the multifunction lever. These lights are also controlled
automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.
A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the center
console. You can turn this light on and off from the dimmer
control in the multifunction lever. This light is also con-
trolled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom
position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and
prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is
opened.
Courtesy/Reading Light Switches
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking
lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Cargo Lamp
The courtesy and dome lights will turn on in the following
cases: when the front doors are opened, when dimmer
control switch on the multifunction lever is rotated fully
upward, or if equipped, when the unlock button is pushed
on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob.
The sports bar reading lights (available on four-door
models) can be turned on by pushing the switches, located
on either side of the lens. Push a switch a second time to
turn the light off.
Dimmer Control
Sports Bar Reading Light
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
The rear cargo light may be turned on by pushing the lens.
Push the lens a second time to turn the light off.
When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating
the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will
cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is also known
as the “Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay
open for extended periods of time without discharging the
vehicle’s battery.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/Washer” in this
section for more information.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper opera-
tion. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent
Rear Cargo Light
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles,
desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent
position for one of five intermittent settings. The delay
cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If
the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Front Wiper Control
Front Wiper Control
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate
for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released.
Then, the intermittent interval previously selected will
resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the wipers
will turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long
as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue to
operate.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
A rotary switch on the center portion of the control lever
(located on the right side of the steering column) controls
the operation of the rear wiper/washer function.
Mist Control
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent position
for rear wiper operation.
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to
activate the rear washer. The washer pump and
the wiper will continue to operate as long as the
switch is held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle
two to three times before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to
the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return to
the “park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control Overview
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Manual Temperature Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the Knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost mode is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging.
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotat-
ing the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the off position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
Modes Control
Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Automatic Temperature Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Icon Description
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of
the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. Operation of the system is
quite simple.
Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” in this section for more information.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotat-
ing the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the off position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
Modes Control
Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost
Mode
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost mode is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate on the Auto-
matic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera-
ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
cally maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power window switches are located on the instrument
panel below the radio. Push the switch downward to open
the window and upward to close the window.
The top left switch controls the left front window and the
top right switch controls the right front window.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, the power window switches will remain active
for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster dis-
play, the power window switches will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
Power Window Switches
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Four-Door Models
The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger
window, and the lower right switch controls the right rear
passenger window.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting the
window opening.
DUAL TOP — TWO DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED
Please visit http://www.jeep.com/en/wrangler-rooftop-
instructions/ for instructional videos.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must
remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top is
removed, the pivot brackets must also be removed from
the sport bar. The soft top was installed at the factory for
shipping purposes only. The soft top and the hard top are
to be used independently. Removal is mandatory to
prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top. Your
vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from
both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for
extended periods of time.
Removing The Soft Top — Two Door Models
1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
following items:
• Right and left door frames
• Four door frame attachment knobs
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
• Two rear window roll up straps
• Two Sunrider secure straps (if equipped)
• Two rear swing gate brackets
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal”
in this section.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
3. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket screws
(two per side) using a #T30 Torx head driver.
4. Disconnect the knuckles from the left and right metal
pivot brackets. Remove the soft top from the vehicle and
store in a clean, dry location.
NOTE: To aid in disconnecting the knuckles, you may
carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet.
5. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the
pivot brackets. Remove the brackets using a #T30 Torx
head driver. Recover and re-zip the sports bar cover.
Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe place.
6. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Installa-
tion” in this section.
Installing The Soft Top — Two Door Models
NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up
only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in
this section.
Step Three
Step Four
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top
removal:
• Right and left door frames
• Door frame attachment knobs (four for two-door mod-
els, six for four-door models)
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal”
in this section.
3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in this
section.
4. If the soft top has been removed, follow these steps to
reinstall the soft top. If the soft top is on the vehicle,
proceed to step #5.
a. If the pivot brackets have been removed, unzip the
sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the
sports bar with the four screws that were removed
using a #T30 Torx head driver. Re-cover and re-zip
the sport bar covers.
b. Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the
bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the
bows facing upward.
c. Reattach the knuckles onto the metal pivot brackets.
NOTE: To aid in reattaching the knuckles, you may care-
fully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet.
d. Screw the pivot screws back into place using a #T30
Torx head driver. Secure them until they are snug,
being careful not to cross-thread the screws or over-
tighten.
Step Four
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws
if they are overtightened.
5. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for bottom
of rear window) and set aside.
NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.
6. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.
NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual
top wrap.
7. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Raising The
Soft Top” in this section.
DUAL TOP — FOUR DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED
Please visit http://www.jeep.com/en/wrangler-rooftop-
instructions/ for instructional videos.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must
remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top is
removed, the pivot brackets must also be removed from
the sport bar. The soft top was installed at the factory for
shipping purposes only. The soft top and the hard top are
to be used independently. Removal is mandatory to
prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top. Your
vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from
both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for
extended periods of time.
Step Four
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Removing The Soft Top — Four Door Models
1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
following items:
• Right and left door frames
• Six door frame attachment knobs
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
• Two rear window roll up straps
• Two Sunrider secure straps (if equipped)
• Two rear swing gate brackets
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal”
in this section.
3. Ensure the tether strap is secure to the pivot bracket.
Unbutton the side bow tether strap (both sides).
Step Three
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
4. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle, slide the
tether strap up the side bow (both sides).
5. The tether strap must be hooked onto the pivot bracket
prior to removal of soft top from vehicle (both sides).
6. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket bolts
(two per side) from the sport bar using a 10.0 mm
wrench or socket driver.
7. Lift the soft top in a upward motion to release the pivot
bracket from the sport bar bracket.
Step Four
Step Five
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
8. Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a
clean, dry location (another person may be needed to
help with this operation).
NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold the
bundle up, the other to remove the brackets.
9. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Installa-
tion” in this section.
Step Seven Step Eight
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Installing The Soft Top — Four Door Models
NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up
only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in
this section.
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top
removal:
• Right and left door frames
• Six door frame attachment knobs
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal”
in this section.
3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in this
section.
4. Install the soft top with the pivot brackets above the
sport bar brackets, lower the soft top into the sport bar
bracket slots in a downward motion to lock tab on soft
top. You will need to lift the top to get the brackets to
line up. (Another person may be needed to help with
this operation.)
NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold the
soft top up, the other to align the brackets.
Step Four
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Lower the pivot bracket onto the sport bar bracket
mounting tab in a downward motion to lock into tab.
6. Install the pivot bracket bolts back into place using a
10.0 mm wrench or socket driver. Secure them until they
are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the screws or
overtighten.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws
if they are overtightened.
7. Remove the tether strap from the pivot bracket.
Step Five
Step Seven
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
8. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle remove the
tether strap from the bracket hook by sliding strap up
off hook and slide down the side bow (both sides).
9. Button the side bow tether strap (both sides).
10. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for bottom
of rear window) and set aside.
NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.
Step Eight
Step Nine
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
11. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.
NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual
top wrap.
12. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Raising The
Soft Top” in this section.
FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD
TOP — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
• The hard top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunt-
ing, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it
was not designed as a structural member of the
vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry any addi-
tional loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
etc.).
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the front header, sport bar,
and body side or fully removed.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to panel removal. Removing the top, opening a door
or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• The hard top assembly must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Front Panel(s) Removal
NOTE: Left panel must be removed before removing
right panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the side.
2. Turn the rear fasteners (located on the overhead speaker
bar assembly) counterclockwise until they can be re-
moved.
3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from the center of
the roof panel.
Step Two
Step Three
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located above the shoulder
belt anchorage).
5. Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the
windshield.
6. Remove the left-hand panel.
To remove the right panel, follow the steps above except
for Step 3.
Step Four
Step Five
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Freedom Top Storage Bag
Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top Modular Hard Top,
come with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows you to
store your Freedom Top panels. The storage bag contains
two compartments and fits behind the rear seat.
Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are
facing downward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer
flap. Release the hook-and-loop fastener on the black panel
divider and fold it back.
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed
prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag.
1. Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the
latches facing downward.
Step One
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
laying flat). Secure the hook-and-loop fastener, located
at the center of the divider.
3. Insert the left-side Freedom panel into the bag with the
latches facing upward.
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed
prior to inserting the panel into the bag.
Step Two
Step Three
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed.
5. Install the seat attachment strap (at the top of the bag)
through the loops.
6. Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and
straps facing the back of the rear seat. Attach the clips at
the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages,
located at the base of the rear seat.
Step Four
Step Five
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints
and loop the strap through the buckle. Pull on the strap
to tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear
seat.
Front Panel(s) Installation
NOTE: Set the panels on the windshield frame so that
there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are
sitting flush with the body.
1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Step Six Step Seven
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top
Removed
1. Turn the left and right panels over and move the spacer
block (located on the rear of the panel) upward 90
degrees.
NOTE: The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Set the panels on the windshield frame so
that there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels
are sitting flush with the body.
2. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Rear Hard Top Removal
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s)
Removal” in this section.
2. Open both doors.
3. Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard
top at the B-pillar (near the top of the door) using a #40
Torx head driver (Four–Door Only).
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard
top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside) using a
#40 Torx head driver.
Step One
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of
the rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.
6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of
the vehicle.
Step Five Wire Harness Connector
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
7. Release the red locking tab by pulling outward to the
right.
8. To remove the wiring harness push the tab and pull
downward to disconnect.
9. To remove the washer hose, pinch the grips on hose
connector and pull downward.
Red Locking Tab
Push Tab To Disconnect
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
10. Close the swing gate.
11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the hard
top on a soft surface to prevent damage.
CAUTION!
The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults
located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution
could damage the Freedom Top.
Rear Hard Top Installation
NOTE: If the door frames are installed from soft top usage,
they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top.
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in
reverse order.
Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body
at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap
between the lift glass and hard top.
NOTE:
• The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body
should be torqued to 88 in lb +/- 22 in lb (10 N·m +/-
2.5 N·m).
• It is not necessary to pinch connection when reinstall-
ing washer hose. Push on until click is heard.
Pinch Grip On Hose
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
DOOR FRAME
WARNING!
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection
that they can provide. This procedure is furnished
for use during off-road operation only.
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
•
Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is
wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable door
frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Door Frame Removal
1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment knobs
(two per door).
Step One
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Use both hands to remove the door frames. The door
frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands
are not used.
2. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the
front of the door frame.
3. Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to
remove the frame from the vehicle.
4. Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for
storage. Store in a secure location.
WARNING!
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection
that they can provide. This procedure is furnished
for use during off-road operation only.
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
Step Three
Step Four
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Door Frame Installation — Two Door Models — If
Equipped
1. Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body
side, behind the door opening.
3. After the door frame pin has been set into the body side
hole, carefully set the front of the door frame into the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
4. Starting with the front of the door frame, clip it over the
metal side bar and then clip the rear, making sure that
the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the
door frame.
Step Two
Step Four
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Starting with the front knob, screw in and tighten both
knobs. Repeat on the other side.
Door Frame Installation — Four Door Models — If
Equipped
1. Install the rear door frame first.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body
side, just behind the rear door opening.
Step Five Step Two
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
3. Position the top of the door frame against the metal
sport bar and push onto the side bar, making sure not to
pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure
it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of
the rear door.
4. Loosely install the rear knob (long knob) to hold the
door rail in position.
5. Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
Step Three
Step Five
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making
sure that the material for the side bar cover is not
pinched by the door frame.
7. Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top of
the front of the rear door frame. Ensure the seals are
installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
8. Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front
knob (long knob). Then, install the middle knob (short
knob) through the front and rear door frames and screw
into the top of the B-pillar.
9. Tighten the front knob, then the rear most knob, and
then the middle knob. Repeat this procedure for the
other side.
Step Seven
Step Nine
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
SOFT TOP — TWO DOOR MODELS
Please visit http://www.jeep.com/en/wrangler-rooftop-
instructions/ for instructional videos.
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also removed.
Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle
causing harm to the driver and passengers.
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not rely
on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to
protect against injury during an accident. Remember,
always wear seat belts.
• Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when installing and removing the soft tops.
The zippers and side bows may cause serious injury
if fingers or hands get caught in between.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting,
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and,
thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top has
been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear
to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put
up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl
coating on the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the
top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C)
or below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the
rear or side curtains.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build up may
result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is below
41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or fully
lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models”
in “Bodywork” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
further information. It contains important informa-
tion on cleaning and caring for your vehicle’s fabric
top.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top frame-
work when opening or closing. Damage to the top
may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top
Refer to “Lowering The Soft Top” in this section for further
information.
1. Remove the side windows.
2. Remove the back window.
Step One
Step Two
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Release header latches from the windshield frame.
4. Release the sail panel retainers from the body side
channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is helpful
to pull down on the rear roof bow.
Step Three
Step Four
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
5. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over the
Sunrider link to lock in the link (Sunrider Models only).
6. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so that
they rest on top of the soft top.
Step Five Step Six
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Release the Sunrider latch (both sides). 8. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
NOTE: Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the
vehicle.
Step Seven
Step Eight
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top
Refer to “Raising The Soft Top” in this section for further
information.
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider latches (another person may be needed to help
with this operation).
Step One
Step One
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Engage header latches. 3. Install rear corner panels.
Step Two Step Three
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
4. Install the back window.
5. Install the side windows.
6. To install the side windows, affix the window tempo-
rarily by attaching to the hook-and-loop fastener in the
rear corner. Start the zipper but close only about 1 inch
(2.5 cm).
Step Four
Step Six
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so
can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the
window.
Step Seven
Retainer Insertion
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
8. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window
into the bottom side channel, beginning at the front and
working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by closing the
zipper completely and attaching the hook-and-loop
fastener along the top and rear of the window. Repeat
this step for the opposite side.
Step Eight
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lowering The Soft Top
Side View Top And Components
1 — 3–Bow 6 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
2 — 2–Bow 7 — Quarter Window
3 — Header Bow 8 — Sail Panel
4 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window 9 — Check Strap
5 — Body Side Retainer
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
Rear View Top And Components
1 — Sail Panels
2 — Zipper Finish
3 — Swing Gate Bar
4 — Zipper Start
5 — Swing Gate Brackets
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft
top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc.,
clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush.
Cleaning products are available through your authorized
dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow the half-door windows carefully outside of
the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the
loops on the windshield.
Step Three
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
4. Open the swing gate.
5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3
inches (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel.
Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rear-
ward out of the swing gate brackets.
6. Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner
of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the top and
down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls will stay on
the rear window. Pull down on the rear window to
disengage it from the zipper on the top cover.
Step Five
Step Six
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate
bracket on both the left and right sides.
8. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.
9. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener that runs along the
top and rear edge of the side window.
10. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely un-
zip the window.
Step Seven Step Ten
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
11. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers
from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat
this step on the opposite side.
12. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is helpful
to pull down on the rear roof bow.
13. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so
that they rest on top of the soft top.
Step Twelve
Step Thirteen
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
14. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket
forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward
the vehicle to disengage.
15. Completely release the latches from the loops on the
windshield frame. If your vehicle is not equipped
with the Sunrider package, proceed to Step 18.
Step Fourteen
Step Fifteen
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
16. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over the
Sunrider link to lock in the link (Sunrider Models
only).
17. Unlatch the side bows from both door rails (Sunrider
Models only).
18. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to prevent
possible damage to the rear center high-mounted brake
light. Move to the front of the vehicle. Grasp the side
bow behind the header and lift the top, folding it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.
Step Sixteen
Step Seventeen
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
19. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows
and as far inward as possible. This will keep any
portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle.
20. Close the front header latches.
21. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
Step Eighteen Step Nineteen
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
Raising The Soft Top
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Install door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door Frame”
in this section for further information.
3. Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider link
(Sunrider Models only).
4. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the
side bow and the 2–bow (middle bow) up and over the
sports bar until the header rests on the top of the
windshield frame.
Step Three
Step Four
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Make sure the Sunrider bracket on the side bows latches
to the door rails (Sunrider Models only).
6. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the latches).
Step Five
Step Six
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
7. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them by
hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side
of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and over
the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the
rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only be
clipped to the shortened rail edge.
8. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail
panels over the rear roof bow.
Step Seven
Step Eight
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
9. Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body
side channel, leaving the last 3 inches (7.6 cm) toward
the rear window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on
the rear roof bow (3–bow) will aid to reach the channel
with the retainers.
10. To install the side windows, affix the window tempo-
rarily by attaching to the hook-and-loop fastener in the
rear corner. Start the zipper but close only about 1 inch
(2.5 cm).
Step Nine
Step Ten
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
11. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so
can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the
window.
Step Eleven
Retainer Insertion
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
12. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the win-
dow into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
closing the zipper completely and attaching the hook-
and-loop fastener along the top and rear of the win-
dow. Repeat this step for the opposite side.
Step Twelve
Step Twelve
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
13. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down
and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when
closed.
14. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends at
the lower left corner of the rear window opening.
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and
aligned before zipping to prevent damage.
Step Thirteen
Step Fourteen
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
15. Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the
window.
16. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing
gate brackets.
17. Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate
bracket on both the left and right sides.
Step Fourteen Step Sixteen
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
18. Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the rear
soft top bow (3–bow), then complete attaching the sail
panel retainers into the body side channel.
19. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to
their secured position.
SUNRIDER (TWO DOOR MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider feature open, it is recom-
mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.
Step Seventeen Step Nineteen
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening The Sunrider
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the wind-
shield frame.
3. Make sure to slide the plastic sleeves forward to unlock
the Sunrider links.
4. Grasp the header and lift the top back. Make sure the
material is folded back as shown.
Step Two
Step Three
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE: The Sunrider latch on the door rail should not be
activated for Sunrider use. If activated, the soft top must be
reinstalled starting from the sail panels.
5. Locate the straps to secure the side bows. Wrap the
straps around the bows as shown. Repeat on the other
side.
6. Reposition the sun visors.
Closing The Sunrider
1. Remove the straps from the side bows.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the
vehicle.
4. Hook the header latches to the loops on the windshield
frame, close latches, and return the sun visors to their
original positions.
Step Four
Step Five
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider link.
SOFT TOP — FOUR DOOR MODELS
Please visit http://www.jeep.com/en/wrangler-rooftop-
instructions/ for instructional videos.
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also removed.
Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle
causing harm to the driver and passengers.
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not rely
on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to
protect against injury during an accident. Remember,
always wear seat belts.
• Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when installing and removing the soft tops.
The zippers and side bows may cause serious injury
if fingers or hands get caught in between.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting,
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and,
thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top has
been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear
to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put
up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl
coating on the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the
top can then be snapped into place. If the temperature is
41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top down or
roll the rear or side curtains.
CAUTION!
•
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash.
Window scratches and wax build up may result.
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is below
41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or fully
lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
•
Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models” in
“Bodywork” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for fur-
ther information. It contains important information on
cleaning and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top frame-
work when opening or closing. Damage to the top
may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: Do not remove any of the three attachment knobs
unless you are planning on installing the hard top.
Attachment Knobs
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top
1. Remove the side windows.
2. Remove the back window.
NOTE: Start zipper from the right side to remove back
window.
Step One
Step Two
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
3. Release header latches from the windshield frame. 4. Release the sail panel retainers from the body side
channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is helpful
to pull down on the rear roof bow.
Step Three
Step Four
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft
top.
6. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric to the rear.
Step Five
Step Six
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133
7. Release Sunrider latch (both sides). 8. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
Step Six Step Seven
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of the
vehicle.
Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider latches (another person may be needed to help
with this operation).
Step Eight
Step One
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135
2. Install rear corner panels.
Step One
Step Two
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate the header forward. 4. Engage the header latches.
Step Three Step Four
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137
5. Install the back window. 6. Install the side windows.
Step Five Step Six
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. To install the side windows, affix the window tempo-
rarily by attaching to the hook-and-loop fastener in the
rear corner. Start the zipper but close only about 1 inch
(2.5 cm).
8. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so
can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the
window.
Step Seven
Retainer Insertion
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139
9. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window
into the bottom side channel, beginning at the front and
working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by closing the
zipper completely and attaching the hook-and-loop
fastener along the top and rear of the window. Repeat
this step for the opposite side.
Step Nine
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lowering The Soft Top
Side View Top And Components
1 — 4–Bow 6 — Quarter Window
2 — 3–Bow 7 — Body Side Retainer
3 — 2–Bow 8 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
4 — Header Bow 9 — Sail Panel
5 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window 10 — Check Strap
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141
Rear View Top And Components
1 — Sail Panels
2 — Zipper Finish
3 — Swing Gate Bar
4 — Zipper Start
5 — Swing Gate Brackets
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft
top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc.,
clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush.
Cleaning products are available through your authorized
dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half-doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow half-door windows carefully outside of the
vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Release the header latches and hooks from the loops on
the windshield frame.
Step Three
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143
4. Open the swing gate.
5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3
inches (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel.
Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rear-
ward out of the swing gate brackets.
6. Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner
of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the top and
down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls will stay on
the rear window. Pull down on the rear window to
disengage it from the zipper on the top cover.
Step Five
Step Six
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate
bracket on both the left and right sides.
8. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.
9. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener that runs along the
top and rear edge of the side window.
10. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely un-
zip the window.
Step Seven Step Ten
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145
11. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers
from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat
this step on the opposite side.
12. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is helpful
to pull down on the rear roof bow.
13. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft
top.
Step Twelve
Step Thirteen
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
14. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket
forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward
the vehicle to disengage.
15. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift the
top.
Step Fourteen
Step Fifteen
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147
16. Fold back the front section of the top, pulling the fabric
rearward. Gently rest the header on top of the rear
portion of the deck.
17. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙ as shown.
Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds.
Step Sixteen
Step Seventeen
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
18. Release the side bows by pushing down on the latch
above the front of the rear door. Push the top rearward
to disengage. Repeat this step on the other side.
19. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to prevent
possible damage to the rear center high-mounted brake
light. Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top
along the door frame track to the rear door frame.
Step Eighteen
Step Nineteen
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149
20. Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track and
lower the top down into the vehicle.
NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.
21. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows
as far inside as possible. This will keep any portion of
the top from flapping outside of the vehicle.
22. Once the top is fully down, use the hook-and-loop
fastener provided to secure the top to the vehicle by
wrapping the strap around the side bows and through
the slot on the body.
23. Close the front header latches.
24. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
Step Twenty
Step Twenty-Two
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Raising The Soft Top
NOTE: Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top
to prevent the doors from getting scratched. It may be
helpful to open the rear doors.
1. Install the door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
2. Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down
position and store in secure location.
3. Open the swing gate.
4. Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the rear
door frames.
NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.
Step Four
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151
5. Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door
frame tracks and slide the top forward.
6. Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider locking
mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear
doors.
Step Five
Step Six
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
8. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the
side bow until it rests on the windshield frame.
9. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the latches).
Step Eight
Step Nine
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153
10. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them
by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior
side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and
over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of
the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only
be clipped to the shortened rail edge.
11. Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before
pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow (4–bow).
Step Ten
Step Eleven
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side
channel, leaving the last 3 inches (7.6 cm) toward the rear
window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on the rear
roof bow (4–bow) will aid in reaching the channel with the
retainers.
12. To install the side windows, affix the window tempo-
rarily by attaching it to the hook-and-loop fastener in
the upper rear corner. Start the zipper but close only
about 1 inch (2.5 cm).
Step Eleven
Step Twelve
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155
13. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so
can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the
window.
Step Thirteen
Retainer Insertion
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
14. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the win-
dow into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
closing the zipper completely and attaching the hook-
and-loop fastener along the top and rear of the win-
dow. Repeat this step for the opposite side.
Step Fourteen
Step Fourteen
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 157
15. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down
and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when
closed.
16. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends at
the lower left corner of the rear window opening.
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and
aligned before zipping to prevent damage.
Step Fifteen
Step Sixteen
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
17. Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of the
window.
18. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing
gate brackets.
19. Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate
bracket on both the left and right sides.
Step Eighteen
Step Nineteen
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159
20. Complete the installation of the sail panel by inserting
the rest of the retainer into the body channel.
21. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to
their secured position.
SUNRIDER (FOUR DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider feature open, it is recom-
mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.
Opening The Sunrider
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the wind-
shield frame.
Step Twenty-One
Step Two
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift the
top.
4. Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest the
header on top of the rear portion of the deck.
Step Three Step Four
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 161
5. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙ as shown.
Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds.
6. Secure the top by using the two provided straps. Each
strap will wrap around the side bow and hook-and-loop
fastener to itself; use one strap on each side of the
vehicle.
Closing The Sunrider
Perform the above steps in the opposite order.
NOTE: Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the
material to sag and may block the rearview mirror.
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield and removable side bars on
your vehicle are structural elements that can provide some
protection in some accidents. The windshield also provides
some protection against weather, road debris and intrusion
of small branches and other objects.
Step Five
Step Six
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down and the side bars removed as you lose the protection
these structural elements can provide.
If required for certain off-road uses, the side bars can be
removed and the windshield folded down. However, the
protection afforded by these features is then lost. If you
remove the side bars and fold down the windshield, drive
slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the speed of
the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with low range
operation preferred if you are driving off-road with the
windshield folded down.
Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as
the task that required their removal is completed and
before you return to on-road driving. Both you and your
passenger should wear seat belts at all times, on-road and
off-road, regardless of whether the windshield is raised or
folded down.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If you
choose to remove the doors, see your authorized dealer for
a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law
requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against
personal injury:
• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the wind-
shield down.
• Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at all
times when the windshield is down.
• Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for
raising the windshield. Make sure that the folding
windshield, windshield wipers, side bars, and all
associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and
tightly assembled before driving your vehicle. Fail-
ure to follow these instructions may prevent your
vehicle from providing you and your passengers’
protection in some accidents.
• If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door may
cause personal injury.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 163
Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars
1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following
the instructions in this manual.
NOTE: To assist in properly reinstalling side bars, mark
the original locations prior to removing.
2. Remove the two top hex bolts (13 mm), and the one side
hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the trim (Do not
remove plastic corner trim, sun visor bolts, or sport bar
covering).
3. Remove the sun visor.
4. Remove the A-pillar cap.
5. Disconnect microphone (if equipped with Uconnect
phone).
6. Open the sport bar hook-and-loop fastener covering.
7. Remove the one hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the
plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar, one hex
bolt (13 mm) on the side of the side bar, and one hex bolt
(13 mm) on top of the side bar.
NOTE: Pull side bar out horizontally when removing.
Step Two
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not remove the head impact foam from the side
bars, as damage to the foam may result.
NOTE: Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
8. Remove the side bar assembly, and reattach the sport
bar hook-and-loop fastener covering.
9. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle, use four
cinch straps (available from your authorized dealer).
Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor
behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin
cover.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you carry the side bars
loose in your vehicle. Remove the side bars from the
vehicle or securely store them as described or they may
cause personal injury if an accident occurs. See your
authorized dealer for the cinch straps.
10. Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the
wiper away from the windshield and out to the “lock”
position. Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps, and remove
the retaining nuts. Lift the wiper arms off and store
them in the center console or securely behind the rear
seat.
NOTE: It may be necessary to use a battery terminal puller
tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the shaft after
the nuts have been removed.
Step Seven
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 165
11. Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the
six black round-headed Torx head screws (using a #40
Torx head driver) on each side of the base of the
windshield.
12. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the
rubber hood bumpers.
13. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through
the footman hoop on the center of the hood and on the
center of the windshield frame. Tighten the strap to
secure the windshield in place.
Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars
1. Raise the windshield.
CAUTION!
The windshield must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing.
• Careless handling and installation of the windshield
may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicles interior and may cause interior water dam-
age, stains or mildew.
• Improper installation of the windshield may also
create wind noise while vehicle is moving.
Step Eleven
166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar.
Refer to Step 4 of “Lowering Windshield And Removing
Side Bars” earlier in this section.
3. Reattach the sport bar hook-and-loop fastener covering.
4. Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield frame.
5. Install the top two hex bolts (13 mm) first, then the lower
side hex bolt (13 mm). The lower side bolt will not align
until the top two bolts are installed.
Step Two Step Five
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 167
6. Tighten all side bar attachment bolts.
7. Install the lower windshield plates with the six black
round-headed Torx head screws (using a #40 Torx head
driver) on each side of the base of the windshield.
8. Reinstall the wiper arms.
HOOD
Opening The Hood
Release both the hood latches.
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the
middle of the hood opening. Push the safety latch to the
left side of the vehicle, to open the hood. You may have to
push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety
latch. Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood.
Step Seven
Hood Latch
168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing The Hood
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the hood
panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood
slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using the key,
Remote Keyless Entry key fob, or by activating the power
door lock switches located on the front doors.
To open the swing gate, push the button on the gate
handle.
NOTE: Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to
close the swing gate (hard top models only).
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and
your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flip-up window closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
Swing Gate Handle
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 169
CAUTION!
Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing the rear
flip-up window, as damage to the blade will result.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Console Storage Compartment
To lock or unlock the storage compartment, insert the
ignition key and turn. To open the storage compartment,
push the latch and lift the cover.
There is an extra storage area underneath the console lid.
The console lid has an integrated paper clip feature that
can hold small items.
Center Console
170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The rear cargo area storage compartment cover is held by
a spring-loaded latch. In order to remove the rear storage
compartment cover, use the following procedure:
NOTE: The rear storage compartment latch should not
be used as cargo tie-down.
1. Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular (straight up)
to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees, so it is
parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.
3. Open the rear compartment cover.
Center Console Lid Storage
Rear Storage Cover
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 171
Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center
console.
Electrical Power Outlets
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power outlets that
can provide power for accessories designed for use with
the standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of the
instrument panel below the climate controls, and is pow-
ered from the ignition switch. Power is available when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used in
the power outlet, it heats when pushed in and pops out
automatically when ready for use. To preserve the heating
element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position.
A second power outlet is located inside the center console
and is powered directly from the vehicle battery.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Front Power Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 173
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is a
third power outlet located in the right rear cargo area.
Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear With Sub Woofer
(Opt.)
174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 175
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
front of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the outlet, the inverter should reset. If
the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the
power inverter may have to be reset manually. To reset the
inverter manually, push the power inverter button to turn
it off and then push it again to turn it back on. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electri-
cal devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter button is located on
the instrument panel below the climate
controls. To turn on the power outlet,
push the button once. The indicator
light will illuminate. Push the button a
second time to turn the power inverter
outlet off.
NOTE: When the power inverter button is pushed, there
will be a delay of approximately one second before the
inverter indicator light turns on.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter
176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................178
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............178
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY — IF
EQUIPPED .............................181
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .............................181
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages .........183
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ......184
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........191
▫ Red Warning Lights .....................191
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...................194
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights ...................198
▫ Green Indicator Lights ...................198
▫ White Indicator Lights ...................198
▫ Blue Indicator Lights ....................199
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .199
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................199
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............200
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................200
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.
2. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
Instrument Cluster
178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer
in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
4. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
5. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area
• The odometer display shows the total distance the
vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows
individual trip mileage.
• U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If
your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the
repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If they
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is
a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer
reading before the repair/service, so that you can be
sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb
sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
All messages will display in the instrument cluster display,
if equipped. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display— If
Equipped” in this section for further information.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
• ECO — Fuel Saver Indicator
• DOOR — Door Open
• GATE — Swing Gate Open
• LOW TIRE — Low Tire Pressure
• HOTOIL — Oil Temperature Above Normal Limits
• GASCAP — Fuel Cap Fault
• NOFUSE — Fuse Fault
• CHANGE OIL — Oil Change Required
6. Telltales
• Hard and Soft Telltales (Symbols) appear based on
specific behaviors.
7. Instrument Cluster Display / Compass Mini-Trip
Computer Display — If Equipped
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Mini-Trip Computer messages.
180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
tems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t.
The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and make selec-
tions and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The instrument cluster
display consists of the following:
• Compass Heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
• Outside Temperature (°F or °C)
• ECO Display
• Digital Speedometer
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty
• Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped
• Elapsed Time
• Vehicle Info
• Units Selection
• System Status and Warnings (Door Open, etc.)
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — MENU Button 3 — Down Arrow Button
2 — Right Arrow Button 4 — Compass Button
182 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• MENU Button
Push and release the MENU button to advance the display
to each of the instrument cluster display Main Menu
features or to return to the Main Menu from a submenu.
Upon reaching the last item in the Main Menu the instru-
ment cluster display will advance to the first item in the
Main Menu with the next MENU button push and release.
• Compass Button
Push and release the compass button to return to the
Compass/Outside Temperature/Audio Information/ECO
screen whenever the current display is not the Compass/
Outside Temperature/Audio Information/ECO screen.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button when prompted
by the instrument cluster display to Reset Main Menu
features with a reset capability or to change Personal
Settings.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button when prompted
by the instrument cluster display to step through Vehicle
Info submenu, stored system warning messages, or Per-
sonal Settings features.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the instrument
cluster will display the following messages:
• Low Tire Pressure
• Low Fuel
• Service TPM System (refer to ⬙Tire Pressure Monitoring
System⬙ in ⬙Safety⬙ for further information)
• Damaged Key
• Key In Ignition
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Key Fob Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle Not in Park —
automatic transmission
• Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle in Motion —
manual transmission
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
• Door Open (with vehicle graphic showing which door is
open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion)
• Gate Open (with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate/
back door open and a single chime sounds if the vehicle
is in motion)
• Check Gascap (refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information)
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Compass, Outside Temperature Display / ECO (Fuel
Saver Mode) — If Equipped
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. Push and release the compass button to display one
of eight compass headings, the outside temperature/ECO
if the instrument cluster display is not already displaying
this screen.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be
driven several minutes before the updated temperature is
displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the dis-
played temperature; therefore, temperature readings are
not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
The ECO message will display below the outside tempera-
ture in the instrument cluster display (if the audio system
is on the ECO indicator will override the audio information
display line if the ⬙Display Fuel Saver⬙ personal setting is
ON — see ⬙Personal Settings⬙ section). This message will
appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in
a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need
to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic, and the instrument cluster
display will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or
more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the
instrument cluster display turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as build-
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
does not appear in the instrument cluster display, you must
put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as
follows:
1. Start the engine. Leave the gear selector in PARK in
order to enter the instrument cluster display Program-
ming Menus.
2. Push the MENU button until Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) displays in the in-
strument cluster display.
3. Push the down arrow button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the right arrow button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in the
instrument cluster display.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
ences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from the
top of the instrument panel; this is where the compass
sensor is located.
To Change The Compass Variance:
1. Turn the ignition switch RUN (it is not necessary to start
the engine).
2. Push the MENU button until Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) displays in the in-
strument cluster display.
3. Push the down arrow button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the right arrow button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Push and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Digital Speedometer
Shows the actual vehicle speed in mph or km/h.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average fuel economy can be reset by pushing and holding
the right arrow button (as prompted in the instrument
cluster display). Upon reset, the history information will be
erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel
average reading before the reset.
Compass Variance Map
186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text
display of ⬙LOW FUEL.” This display will continue until
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of
fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text, and a
new DTE value will display.
Tire Pressure — If Equipped
Push and release the MENU button until “Tire PSI/kpa:”
displays in the instrument cluster display. It shows a
graphic of the vehicle with a tire pressure value at each
corner of the graphic.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in
the RUN or START position.
Elapsed time displays Minutes: Seconds.
After 59 minutes: 59 seconds have elapsed, Hours will be
displayed before Minutes.
Elapsed time can be reset by pushing and holding the right
arrow button (as prompted in the instrument cluster dis-
play). Upon reset, all digits will change to zeros and time
will start again if the ignition switch is in RUN or START.
Vehicle Information
Push and release the MENU button until “Vehicle Infor-
mation” displays in the instrument cluster display. Then,
push the down arrow button to display any one of the
following choices:
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
• Transmission Temperature — Automatic Transmission
Only
Shows the actual transmission fluid temperature.
• Oil Life Remaining (Automatic Oil Change Indicator)
— If Equipped
Shows the oil life measured in percentage.
Units Selection (UNITS IN Display)
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
Average Fuel Economy and Distance to Empty features.
Push and release the down arrow button to toggle units
between ⬙U.S.⬙ and ⬙METRIC.⬙
System Warnings
Displays “SYSTEM OK” if there are no active Warning
Messages stored. Pushing and releasing the down arrow
button when “SYSTEM OK” is displayed will do nothing.
Displays “SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT” if there are
active Warning Messages stored. Pushing and releasing the
down arrow button when “SYSTEM WARNINGS PRES-
ENT” is displayed will display each stored warning for
each button push. Push and release the MENU button to
return to the Main Menu.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features
when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph (0 km/h) (manual
transmission) or when the gear selector is in PARK (auto
transmission).
Push and release the MENU button until Personal Settings
displays in the instrument cluster display.
Use the down arrow button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select one of five languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Push the right
arrow button while in this display to select English,
Espanol or Francais. Then, as you continue, the informa-
tion will display in the selected language.
Auto Lock Doors — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automati-
cally when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or
disabled, to make your selection, push and release the right
arrow button until “On” or “Off” appears.
188 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position, and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, push and release the right arrow
button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Key Fob Unlock — If Equipped
When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock
button. When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, you must
push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is selected,
all of the doors will unlock on the first push of the key fob
unlock button. To make your selection, push and release
the right arrow button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All
Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn With Lock
When on is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the key fob lock button is pushed. This feature may be
selected with or without the Flash Lamp with Lock feature.
To make your selection, push and release the right arrow
button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Flash Lamp With Lock
When on is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key
fob. This feature may be selected with or without the
Sound Horn with Lock feature selected. To make your
selection, push and release the right arrow button until
“On” or “Off” appears.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, push and
release the right arrow button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
appears.
Headlamps With Wipers (Available With Auto
Headlights Only)
When on is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately
10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. If the headlights
were turned on by this feature, they will also turn off when
the wipers are turned off. To make your selection, push and
release the right arrow button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle.”
Key Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window switches,
radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD video system
(if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make
your selection, push and release the right arrow button
until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears.
Illumin. Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the key fob. To make your selection, push
and hold the right arrow button until “Off,” “30 sec,” “60
sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When “On” is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” for system
function and operating information. To make your selec-
tion, push and release the right arrow button until “On” or
“Off” appears.
Display Units In
The instrument cluster display can be changed between
English and Metric units of measure. The units apply to the
Outside Temperature, Average Fuel Economy, and Dis-
tance to Empty. To make your selection, push and release
the right arrow button until “U.S.” or ⬙METRIC⬙ appears.
Nav–Turn By Turn — If Equipped
When on enables display of Navigation System street
name, turn direction, and distance to turn information in
the instrument cluster display. To make your selection,
push and release the right arrow button until “On” or
“Off” appears.
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the compass/outside
temperature/audio information/ECO display. If Display
Fuel Saver is selected as ON, only the ECO message will
display in the audio information/ECO line of the display. If
Display Fuel Saver is selected as OFF, only the audio
information will display in the audio information/ECO
190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
line of the display when the audio system is on. To make
your selection, push and release the right arrow button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Calibrate Compass
Push the right arrow button to calibrate the compass.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the infor-
mation contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are
advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure indica-
tion. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the
light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: As the coolant temperature gauge approaches ⬙H,⬙
this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Sta-
bility Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal (10.6 L),
this light will turn on and a chime will sound. The light
will remain on until fuel is added.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
196 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Front Axle Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
Indicates when the front axle lock has been activated.
— Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been
activated.
— 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive mode, and the front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
— Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front sway bar
is disconnected.
Green Indicator Lights
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
— Cruise Indicator
This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is ON.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC)
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is
in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less
198 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met
while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indi-
cator light will flash on/off.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a
⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas
cap is properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button
to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is
detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL.
Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
200 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................204
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............204
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............205
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............217
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........217
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........226
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........226
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............226
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................227
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........238
▫ Child Restraints .......................249
▫ Transporting Pets ......................268
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................268
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................268
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................269
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................270
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................272
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
204 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Brake Assist System
(BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System
(TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to
enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driv-
ing conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
5
SAFETY 205
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
206 SAFETY
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting using your instrument cluster display, refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
5
SAFETY 207
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within 20
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract-
ing the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
208 SAFETY
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster), starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during accel-
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
The ESC system has three available operating modes in 4H
range. The system has one operating mode in 4L range.
Two-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles in
2H range have two operating modes.
4H Range (4WD Models)
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H range.
5
SAFETY 209
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC
OFF switch. When in ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS
portion of ESC (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the ⬙ESC Off
Indicator Light⬙ will be illuminated.
This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than
ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To
turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch.
This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙
mode by pushing the ESC OFF switch. Once the situation
requiring ESC to be switched to the ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙ mode
is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the
ESC OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING!
• When in ⴖESC Partial Offⴖ mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in ⴖESC Partial Offⴖ mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the en-
hanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the ⴖESC Partial Offⴖ mode.
ESC Full Off
This mode is entered by pushing and holding the ESC OFF
switch for five seconds.
In the ⬙ESC Full Off⬙ mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an
emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Full Off”
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
210 SAFETY
When in ⬙ESC Full Off⬙ mode, ESC and TCS, except for the
Brake Limited Differential (BLD) feature described in the
TCS section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches an
approximate speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). For speeds at or
exceeding approximately 40 mph (64 km/h) the ESC goes
into ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙. When the vehicle speed drops below
35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system goes back to ⬙ESC Full
Off⬙. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
switch. This will restore normal “ESC On” mode of opera-
tion. The ⬙ESC Off Indicator Light” will always be illumi-
nated when ESC is in ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙ and ⬙ESC full Off⬙.
WARNING!
With the ESC in ⴖESC Full Offⴖ mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features offered by ESC
and ERM are disabled. In an emergency evasive ma-
neuver, the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to
assist in maintaining stability. The ⴖESC Full Offⴖ
mode is intended for off-road use only.
4L Range (4WD Models)
ESC Full Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L range.
Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range, or the transfer
case (if equipped) is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to
4L range, the ESC system will be in this mode. In 4L range,
ESC and TCS, except for the Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) feature described in the TCS section, are turned off
until the vehicle reaches an approximate speed of 40 mph
(64 km/h). For speeds at or exceeding approximately
40 mph (64 km/h) the ESC goes into ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙
When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph (56 km/h),
the ESC system goes back to ⬙ESC Full Off⬙. The ESC is in
⬙ESC Full Off⬙ at low vehicle speeds in 4L range so that it
will not interfere with off-road driving, but the ESC
function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds
ESC OFF Switch
5
SAFETY 211
above 40 mph (64 km/h). The “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
will always be illuminated in 4L range when ESC is in ⬙ESC
Full Off⬙ or ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙.
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and an
audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed
in the PARK position from any other position, and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the
message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
With the ESC in ⴖESC Full Offⴖ mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features offered by ESC
and ERM are disabled. In an emergency evasive ma-
neuver, the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to
assist in maintaining stability. The ⴖESC Full Offⴖ
mode is intended for off-road use only.
2H Range (4WD Models) Or 2WD Models
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2H range and
on 2WD vehicles.
ESC Partial Off
When in ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS portion of ESC
(except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS
section), has been disabled and the ⬙ESC Off Indicator
Light⬙ will be illuminated.
This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than
ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To
turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch.
This will restore the normal ⬙ESC On⬙ mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙
mode by pushing the ⬙ESC Full Off⬙ switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the ⬙ESC Partial
Off⬙ mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the ⬙ESC Full Off⬙ switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
The ESC will restore to normal ESC On mode after each
key on.
212 SAFETY
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
5
SAFETY 213
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Tow-
ing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
214 SAFETY
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving. HDC
maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in off-road
driving conditions by applying the brakes when necessary.
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill De-
scent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will be on
solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be
armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting
to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash
on/off.
When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and activates when
the vehicle is descending a hill. HDC speed may be
adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions. The
speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
5
SAFETY 215
Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed
1st 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
2nd 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
3rd 4 mph (6.5 km/h)
4th 5.5 mph (9 km/h)
DRIVE 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
REVERSE 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
However, the driver can override HDC operation by
applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the
HDC control speed. If more speed is desired during HDC
control, the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in
the usual manner. When either the brake or the accelerator
is released, HDC will control the vehicle at the original set
speed.
Enabling HDC
1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Refer to
“Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for further information.
2. Push the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill Descent
Control Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will
turn on solid.
NOTE:
• If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range, the “Hill
Descent Control Indicator Light” will flash for five
seconds and HDC will not be enabled.
• If the ESC senses that the brakes are overheating the
“Hill Descent Control Indicator Light” will flash for
five seconds and HDC will become deactivated until
the brakes have cooled.
Disabling HDC
Push the “Hill Descent” button or shift the transfer case out
of 4WD LOW range. The “Hill Descent Control Indicator”
light in the instrument cluster will turn off.
216 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour
period. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing and Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven;
this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning thresh-
old for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold
placard pressure. Once the TPMS Warning Light has been
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to be turned OFF.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pres-
sures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) air pressure of 35 psi
(241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn ON the “TPMS Warning Light.”
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
5
SAFETY 217
approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the TPMS Warning
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the TPMS Warning
Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the “TPMS
Warning Light.”
218 SAFETY
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the
proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full size spare
tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires. A low
spare tire will not cause the TPMS Warning Light to
illuminate or the chime to sound while stowed in the spare
location.
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
message will display in the instrument cluster,
and an audible chime will be activated when one
or more of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. The system will automatically
update and the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
5
SAFETY 219
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds, and will remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing
the system fault still exists. The TPMS Warning Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
fault can occur by any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles not equipped with instrument cluster display will
inform the driver which tire(s) are low but not provide
actual tire pressure. The low tire ISO telltale will illuminate
along with “LoTIrE” message displayed in the ODO and
then it will scroll to which tire location is lower than the
Placard Value.
Tire location will be displayed as follows:
LF = Left Front
rF = right Front
Lr = Left rear
rr = right rear
220 SAFETY
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped
with a low pressure road tire. In the event that the
matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
show the TPMS Warning Light to be ON, and a chime to
sound. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the TPMS Warning
Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low
pressure warning threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The TPMS
will not be able to monitor the tire pressure. If you install
the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn ON. After driving the vehicle
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. For each subsequent ignition key
cycle, a chime will sound and the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure
is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
SAFETY 221
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the instrument cluster, and a graphic
displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size spare
tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be
activated, when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. A graphic display of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) highlighted or in a
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
222 SAFETY
different color will also be displayed. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units in
PSI, kPa, or BAR.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active
road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate
the low tire(s) that is highlighted or shown in a different
color on the graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure inflation value, as shown in the “Inflate
to XX” message. The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will no longer be
highlighted or shown in a different color and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pres-
sure(s) have been received.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service TPM System Warning
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for a minimum of five seconds. This message is
then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of
the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor(s) is not being received.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
SAFETY 223
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash,
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will not be present,
and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes. A
system fault can occur by any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped
with a low pressure road tire. In the event that the
matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will still
show the TPMS Warning Light to be ON, a chime to
sound, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message to appear in the
instrument cluster, and the graphic display will still
show the low tire pressure value highlighted or shown
in a different color. Driving the vehicle for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the
TPMS Warning Light as long as none of road tires are
below the low pressure warning threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The TPMS
will not be able to monitor the tire pressure. If you install
the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition switch cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will
remain ON, a chime will sound, and the instrument
cluster will still display a highlighted or different color
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. For
224 SAFETY
each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn OFF and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of
the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be deac-
tivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road
tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and
tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster
will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values
in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer be dis-
played as long as no system fault exists.
5
SAFETY 225
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in the rear
seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
226 SAFETY
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
5
SAFETY 227
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
228 SAFETY
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 229
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
230 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
5
SAFETY 231
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
232 SAFETY
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the
rear seatback is not fully latched. This prevents someone
from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt when the
rear seatback is not fully latched.
NOTE: If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be
pulled out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched. If
the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center
lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the Automatic-
Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be activated. To reset
this feature you must let all of the seat belt webbing return
into the retractor. You will not be able to pull out more
webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back
into the retractor.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lock-out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out of
the retractor, immediately take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer for service. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious injury or death.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
5
SAFETY 233
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
234 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
5
SAFETY 235
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(Two-Door Models)
236 SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(Four-Door Models)
5
SAFETY 237
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
238 SAFETY
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
5
SAFETY 239
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
240 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 241
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
242 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Location
5
SAFETY 243
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
244 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Air Bag System Components
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
5
SAFETY 245
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
246 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from
the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical
devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If you have
any doubt, please see an authorized dealer.
5
SAFETY 247
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
248 SAFETY
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
5
SAFETY 249
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–
327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
250 SAFETY
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Re-
straints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
5
SAFETY 251
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
252 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
5
SAFETY 253
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
254 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Label
5
SAFETY 255
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
256 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH anchor-
age system to attach the child re-
straint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
Yes — Four Door
No — Two Door
Four Door Only: You can install child
restraints with flexible lower anchors in
the center position. The inner anchor-
ages are 19 inches (484 mm) apart. Do
not install child restraints with rigid
lower anchors in the center position.
5
SAFETY 257
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH an-
chorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of
the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint own-
er’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? No — Four Door
Yes — Two Door
Two Door Models — All
258 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
5
SAFETY 259
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat, near the floor.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
260 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH
Two-Door Models:
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Four-Door Models:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments
in the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints next to each other, you must
use the seat belt for the center position. You can then
use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt
for installing child seats in the outboard positions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical installation in-
structions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
5
SAFETY 261
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
262 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
5
SAFETY 263
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations (Two-Door
Models)
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations (Four-Door
Models)
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
264 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? No — Four Door
Yes — Two Door
All — Two Door
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retrac-
tor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
5
SAFETY 265
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
266 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
5
SAFETY 267
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
•
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to in-
creased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)
268 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing
it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison
you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
5
SAFETY 269
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is removed.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedal assemblies or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
(Continued)
270 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
5
SAFETY 271
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are
detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
272 SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE ..................275
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........275
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ......275
▫ Normal Starting ........................275
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) .276
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................276
▫ After Starting..........................277
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .277
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .278
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................278
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . .280
▫ Shifting ..............................281
▫ Downshifting..........................282
▫ Reverse Shifting ........................283
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .284
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ................285
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .285
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped ............................285
▫ Gear Ranges ..........................286
▫ Autostick ............................290
䡵 FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION (COMMAND-
TRAC I OR ROCK-TRAC) .................292
▫ Operating Instructions/Precautions ..........292
▫ Shift Positions .........................293
▫ Shifting Procedures .....................294
▫ Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ..........295
▫ Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models ......296
▫ Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped .296
6
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................298
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ...............299
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..........299
▫ To Activate ...........................300
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................301
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................301
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................302
▫ To Resume Speed ......................302
▫ To Deactivate .........................302
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................303
▫ Fuel Filler Cap ........................303
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............304
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................304
▫ Certification Label ......................304
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................306
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............307
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ................309
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .............................310
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............313
▫ Towing Tips...........................316
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................318
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .318
▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models ..............................318
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................321
▫ On-Road Driving Tips ...................321
▫ Off-Road Driving
Tips ...................322
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in NEU-
TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking
ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether or
not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature
enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to
start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal.
The “4WD Indicator Light” will illuminate when the
transfer case has been shifted into this mode.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK
position (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply
the brake before shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10
seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Without Tip Start — Manual Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures,
it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine. This
should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-second
periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the
floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
Weather” procedures.
With Tip Start — Automatic Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures,
it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then,
turn the ignition switch to the START position and release
it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs,
release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
bundled in front of the battery tray.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electri-
cal cord could cause electrocution.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake
is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in RE-
VERSE or FIRST gear.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To
apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake Lever
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position on an automatic trans-
mission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in RE-
VERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal
wear on the clutch.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms
up. This is normal.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
NOTE: A certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle
is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch
pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The
noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is
warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a
problem with your clutch or transmission.
Shift Pattern
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded
or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift speeds
may not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.6L Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H
and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly
less.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recom-
mended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills.
In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better
acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the
engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at
higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and
clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower gear
with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to
the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and
releasing the clutch may result in engine damage.
(Continued)
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch dam-
age, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer
case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause
engine and clutch damage are significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine damage and/or
damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage.
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H
and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly
less.
Reverse Shifting
To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear
train to stop rotating. Beginning from the NEUTRAL
position, move the gear selector in one quick, smooth
motion straight across and into the REVERSE area (the
driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter passes the
“knock-over”). Complete the shift by pulling the gear
selector into REVERSE.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
The “knock-over” provides a resistance to the driver from
accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns
the driver that they are about to shift the transmission into
REVERSE. Due to this feature, a slow shift to REVERSE can
be perceived as a high shift effort.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
(Continued)
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re-
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the ignition
key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position. The key can only be removed from the ignition
when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once
removed the transmission is locked in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the
key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section). To drive, move the gear selector
from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the Autostick shift control. Moving the gear
selector to the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE
position will manually select the transmission gear and
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1,
2, 3, etc. Refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Gear Selector
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
ignition to the LOCK/OFF position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the
LOCK/OFF position first.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: Be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake
• Shift the transmission into PARK
• Turn the engine OFF
• Remove the ignition key
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
WARNING! (Continued)
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re-
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the ignition
key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position (P):
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear selector
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Op-
erating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through underdrive first, second, and third gears,
direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will remain
in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
trolled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will auto-
matically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions
are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Autostick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap
the gear selector to the right or left (+/-) while in the
DRIVE position. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while
using (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current
gear. When AutoStick is active, the current transmission
gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or down-
shift is chosen, except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal will generate an
automatic downshift (for improved acceleration) when
reasonable.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
NOTE: When the transfer case is in the 4L (Low) range, the
transmission will shift automatically (but no higher than
the displayed gear).
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
To disengage AutoStick mode, hold the gear selector to the
right (+) until ⬙D⬙ is once again displayed in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION (COMMAND-
TRAC I OR ROCK-TRAC)
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
Operating Instructions/Precautions
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
• 4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)
• N (Neutral)
• 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions, such as
hard-surfaced roads.
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer
case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L positions are
intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not
intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L
positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire
wear and damage to the driveline components. Refer to
“Shifting Procedures” in this section for further informa-
tion on shifting into 4H or 4L.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel
drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are locked to-
gether. The light will illuminate when the transfer case is
shifted into the 4H position.
NOTE: Do not attempt to shift when only the front or rear
wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not equipped with
a synchronizer, and the front and rear driveshaft speeds
must be equal for a shift to take place. Shifting while the
front or rear wheels are spinning at different speeds can
cause damage to the transfer case.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
2H Position
This range is used for normal street and highway driving
on hard-surfaced roads.
4H Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range (4H) provides additional traction for
loose, slippery road surfaces and should not be used on dry
pavement.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4H position.
N (Neutral) Position
This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
4L Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range (4L) provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
CAUTION!
Exceeding 25 mph (40 km/h) while the transfer case is
engaged in 4L may result in an engine overspeed
condition and engine damage.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4L position.
NOTE: When in 4L, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
display in the instrument cluster.
Shifting Procedures
2H to 4H or 4H to 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the
transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momen-
tarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the
shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case
lever.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
4H to 4L or 4L to 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift an
automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case
lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the
transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed,
place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur
due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the
vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid
attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can
cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle
control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to
both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss
of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs between
the two rear wheels, the differential automatically propor-
tions the usable torque by providing more torque to the
wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a
slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum
traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential,
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control
of your vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel
(to the left of the steering column).
This feature will only activate when the following condi-
tions are met:
• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
To activate the system, push the bottom of the AXLE LOCK
switch once to lock the rear axle only (the “Rear Axle Lock
Indicator Light” will illuminate), push the bottom of the
switch again to lock the front axle (the “Front Axle Lock
Indicator Light” will illuminate). When the rear axle is
locked, pushing the bottom of switch again will lock or
unlock the front axle.
NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles are
fully locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the top of the AXLE LOCK
switch.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L
(Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position.
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon-
necting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater
front suspension travel in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located
on the instrument panel (to the left of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push
the switch again to deactivate the system. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will
illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash during activation transition, or
when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal
driving conditions.
WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on
hardsurfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph (29
km/h); you may lose control of the vehicle, which could
result in serious injury. The front stabilizer bar en-
hances vehicle stability and is necessary for maintain-
ing control of the vehicle. The system monitors vehicle
speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar
at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the
system will once again attempt to return to off-road
mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H or
4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road
position. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this
section for further information. The “Sway Bar Indicator
Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been
fully disconnected.
Sway Bar Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due
to left and right suspension height differences. This condi-
tion is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading.
In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/
reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be
aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be
driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch
again.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash in the
instrument cluster and vehicle stability is greatly re-
duced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph
(29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/ h) may
cause loss of control of the vehicle, which could result
in serious injury. Contact your local authorized dealer
for assistance.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
any way damage the steering system.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked
if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coor-
dinate inspection efforts through your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET (-)
2 — RES (+) 4 — CANCEL
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button, or returning the ignition to
OFF, erases the set speed from memory.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
Fuel Filler Cap
The fuel filler cap is located on the left side of the vehicle.
If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle
when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel filler
cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap
can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap about 1/4 turn until you hear
one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to turn
the message off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in
a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL off.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Trailer Sway Control – If Equipped
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue.
It typically provides adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer sway-
ing motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/
Transmission
Axle Model
GCWR
(Gross Com-
bined Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L/Manual 3.21 Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
6,900 lbs (3
130 kg)
25 sq ft (2.32
sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.73 Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
8,400 lbs (3
810 kg)
25 sq ft (2.32
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.21 Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
6,900 lbs (3
130 kg)
25 sq ft (2.32
sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73 Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
8,400 lbs (3
810 kg)
25 sq ft (2.32
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.21 Two–Door
Sahara Model
(4WD)
7,000 lbs (3
175 kg)
25 sq ft (2.32
sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.73 Two–Door
Sahara Model
(4WD)
8,500 lbs (3
856 kg)
25 sq ft (2.32
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission
Axle Model
GCWR
(Gross Com-
bined Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.21 Two–Door
Sahara Model
(4WD)
7,000 lbs (3
175 kg)
25 sq ft (2.32
sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73 Two–Door
Sahara Model
(4WD)
8,500 lbs (3
856 kg)
25 sq ft (2.32
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
3.6L/Manual 4.10 Two–Door
Rubicon
Model (4WD)
8,600 lbs (3
900 kg)
25 sq ft (2.32
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73 Two–Door
Rubicon
Model (4WD)
8,600 lbs (3
900 kg)
25 sq ft (2.32
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.21 Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
7,400 lbs (3
357 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97
sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.73 Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
8,900 lbs (4
037 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Engine/
Transmission
Axle Model
GCWR
(Gross Com-
bined Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.21 Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
7,400 lbs (3
357 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97
sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73 Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
8,900 lbs (4
037 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.21 Four–Door
Sahara Model
(4WD)
7,500 lbs (3
402 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97
sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.73 Four–Door
Sahara Model
(4WD)
9,000 lbs (4
082 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.21 Four–Door
Sahara Model
(4WD)
7,500 lbs (3
402 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97
sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73 Four–Door
Sahara Model
(4WD)
9,000 lbs (4
082 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission
Axle Model
GCWR
(Gross Com-
bined Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L/Manual 4.10 Four–Door
Rubicon
Model (4WD)
9,200 lbs (4
173 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73 Four–Door
Rubicon
Model (4WD)
9,200 lbs (4
173 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97
sq m)
3,500 lbs (1
587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. the
GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight
referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And Main-
tenance” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package will include a four–pin wiring
harness. Use a factory-approved trailer harness and con-
nector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring
harness.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustration.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and
backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation, then change the transmission
fluid and filter as specified for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before
towing.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick — If Equipped
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the high-
est gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE See Instructions
•
Automatic transmission in PARK.
•
Manual transmission in gear (NOT
in NEUTRAL [N]).
•
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N).
•
Tow in forward direction.
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
•
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial High-
way Safety offices for additional details.
•
For RHD models, refer to the Postal Supplement for Recreational Towing instructions.
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N), automatic transmission must be in PARK, and manual
transmission must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
(Continued)
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in
Neutral) for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine OFF.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is
no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic transmis-
sion in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
10. Turn the engine OFF.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmis-
sion is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.
NOTE: When shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL
(N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid gear clash.
7. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place
manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
8. Release the brake pedal.
9. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
10. Start the engine.
11. Press and hold the brake pedal.
12. Release the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal
(and clutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check
that the vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar-
rower track to make them capable of performing in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Specific design character-
istics give them a higher center of gravity than conven-
tional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-
road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
Off-Road Driving Tips
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE: Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage if so equipped.
1. Remove the two nuts from the bodyside.
2. Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle.
3. Remove the side step assembly.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so
always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain
a good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns
Bodyside Nut
Underside Bolt
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
or braking. In most cases, there are no road signs, posted
speed limits or signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use
your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not.
When on a trail, you should always be looking ahead for
surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan
your future driving route while remembering what you are
currently driving over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other com-
bustible materials. The heat from your vehicle exhaust
system could cause a fire.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road
situation.
When To Use 4L (Low) Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascend-
ing or descending steep hills, and to increase low speed
pulling power. This range should be limited to extreme
situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand
where additional low speed pulling power is needed.
Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be
avoided when in 4L (Low) range.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the vehicle
on dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can
result.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous
use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving). When
climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light
brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from
jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and
the transfer case into 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to
a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-
revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering
wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth,
while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get
a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain your momentum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking
may cause skidding and loss of control.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use second
gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic trans-
mission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low) position to
maintain your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes
pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting
stuck. They are normally full of debris from previous
vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before entering
any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if
there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be
safely recovered if stuck.
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail, main-
tain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The key to
driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure,
accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and main-
taining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are going to be
driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire
pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a
greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drasti-
cally improve your traction and handling while driving on
the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal air
pressure before driving on pavement or other hard sur-
faces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to
reducing the pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types
of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path ahead to
determine the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a
firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it
makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly
while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle
up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of your
vehicle.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or
determine the correct path. Determining the correct path
can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many
obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you over,
through, or around the obstacle. Have the person stand a
safe distance in front of you where they can see the
obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and guide
you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which en-
sures you drive over the largest of them with your tires.
This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The
tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall
and is designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and
make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CAUTION!
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
to strike your axles or undercarriage.
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut,
the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehi-
cle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree
angle and let each tire go through the obstacle indepen-
dently. You need to use caution when crossing large
obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any
large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to
put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in a
rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45-degree
angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to fill
the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You should
now be able to drive out following the trench you just
created at a 45-degree angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an
obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately
10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of
the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While
climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then
ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.
Getting High-Centered
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out of
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung
up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the
best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what
you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few
rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point
when you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the
vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects in-
creases the risk of underbody damage.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to
climb and should not be attempted. You should always feel
confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should
always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to
climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is
on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, shift the transmission
into a lower gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and proceed with
caution, maintaining your momentum as you climb the
hill.
Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up
for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy
constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the
hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the abrupt
change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the front
end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring
all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest
of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the
top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of
a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly
back and forth. This will provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the
surface and will usually provide enough traction to com-
plete the climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the
vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade
using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases
the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Driving Downhill
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine if
it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow, con-
trolled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent?
Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain
control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel confident
in your ability to proceed, then make sure you are in 4L
(Low) and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to
control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but
do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an
incline places more weight on the downhill wheels, which
increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover.
Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and
stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll-
over, which may result in severe injury.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep
hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into RE-
VERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking
to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary,
but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to
the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn around.
To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, which
may result in severe injury. Always back carefully straight
down a hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive
diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or down.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only be
attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible manner.
You should only drive through areas which are designated
and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage
to the environment. You should know your vehicle’s
abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong.
You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing
deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air
intake. If the engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it.
Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any
crossing is low and slow. Shift into first gear (manual
transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the
transfer case in the 4L (Low) position and proceed very
slowly with a constant slow speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8
km/h) maximum} and light throttle. Keep the vehicle
moving; do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After
crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle
differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for
signs of water ingestion.
CAUTION!
• Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
vehicle components, and your brakes will be less
effective once wet and/or muddy.
• When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward.
Driving through water may cause damage that may
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine
if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick.
You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current
and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy
waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not
be intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the
vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water
depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on
the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the
depth and the ability to safely cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to
entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle
recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross,
than proceed using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effective-
ness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt
to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow
water. Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle
downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very
shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt out
from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in
jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury and
vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths
greater than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. Even
the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle down-
stream and out of control if the water is deep enough to
push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body. Before
you proceed, determine the speed of the current, the
water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition and if
there are any obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading
slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at risk
of injury or drowning.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............334
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................334
▫ Replacement Bulbs .....................334
▫ Bulb Replacement ......................335
䡵 FUSES ................................338
▫ General Information .....................338
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module ...........339
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........344
▫ Jack Location .........................345
▫ Spare Tire Removal .....................345
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................346
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................346
▫ Road Tire Installation ....................350
䡵 JUMP STARTING ........................350
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............351
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................352
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............353
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............354
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............355
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............356
▫ Without The Ignition Key .................358
▫ Four–Wheel Drive Models ................358
▫ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .......359
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................359
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............359
7
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger,
and Rear Wash/Wipe)
**
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.
334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 3157NA
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) 168
Fog Lamps PSX24W
Rear Stop/Tail/Turn Lamps (2) 3157
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamps (2) 3157
License Lamp 194
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Bulb Replacement
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Headlamp
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the top
1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335
4. Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1/4
turn counterclockwise and remove.
5. Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining
ring.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
connector locking tab to the lock position.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn clock-
wise.
Front Park/Turn Signal
1. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the top
1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
2. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
3. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counterclockwise and
remove from housing. Pull the bulb straight from the
socket to replace.
Front Side Marker
1. Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front
side marker socket.
2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1/3 turn and
remove it from the housing. Pull the bulb straight from
the socket to replace.
336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Fog Lamp
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front
fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front
fog lamp connector receptacle.
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the
housing and then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp
1. Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light
housing to the body. DO NOT REMOVE THE OUT-
BOARD SCREWS AT ANY TIME.
2. Separate the housing from the body by pushing the
lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the
body.
3. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn counterclock-
wise, then remove it from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
Inboard Screw Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends
upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire. If service is
needed, obtain the LED/Cover Assembly from your local
authorized dealer.
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the four screws holding the lens/cover in place
on the spare tire carrier.
3. Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED
cover.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive cur-
rent.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center contains
cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays. A label that identi-
fies each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown
fuse).
Totally Integrated Power Module
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
J1 – – –
J2 30 Amp Pink – Transfer Case Module
J3 – – –
J4 25 Amp Clear – Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp Clear – Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp Green – Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/
Stability Control System
J7 30 Amp Pink – Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/
Stability Control System
J8 – – –
J9 40 Amp Green – PZEV Sec Motor/Flex Fuel – If Equipped
J10 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Wash Relay/Manifold Tuning
Valve
J11 30 Amp Pink – Sway Bar
J12 – – –
J13 60 Amp Yellow – Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
J14 40 Amp Green – Rear Defroster
J15 40 Amp Green – Front Blower
J17 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
J18 20 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Trans
Range
J19 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper LO/HI
J21 20 Amp Blue – Front/Rear Washer
J22 – – Spare
M1 – 15 Amp Blue Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/
Switch Stop Lamp Feed
M2 – 20 Amp Yellow Relay Trailer Lighting (Stop lamp)
M3 – 20 Amp Yellow Front/Rear Axle Locker Relay
M4 – 2 Amp Grey Clock Spring
M5 – 25 Amp Clear Power Inverter – If Equipped
M6 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #1/Rain Sensor
M7 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT)
M8 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat
M9 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped
M10 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw – Vehicle Entertainment
System, Satellite Digital Audio Receiver
(SDARS), DVD, Hands-Free Module, RA-
DIO, Antenna, Universal Garage Door
Opener, Vanity Lamp
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 341
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
M11 – 10 Amp Red (Ignition Off Draw) Climate Control System,
Underhood Lamp
M12 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier
M13 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw – Cabin Compartment
Node, Wireless Control Module, SIREN,
Multifunction Control Switch
M14 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow (Export Only)
M15 – 20 Amp Yellow Climate Control System, Rear View Mirror,
Cabin Compartment Node, Transfer Case
Switch, Multi-Function Control Switch, Tire
Pressure Monitor, Glow Plug Module – Ex-
port Diesel Only
M16 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
M17 – 15 Amp Blue Left Tail/License/Park Lamp
M18 – 15 Amp Blue Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
M19 – 25 Amp Clear Auto Shut Down (ASD #1 and #2)
M20 – 15 Amp Blue Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light,
Switch Bank
M21 – 20 Amp Yellow Auto Shut Down (ASD #3)
M22 – 10 Amp Red Right Horn (HI/LOW)
M23 – 10 Amp Red Left Horn (HI/LOW)
342 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
M24 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Wiper
M25 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – Export Only
M26 – 10 Amp Red Power Window Switch, Driver Window
Switch
M27 – 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch Feed, Wireless Module
M28 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module
M29 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
M30 – 15 Amp Blue Wiper Motor Frt, J1962 Diagnostic Feed
M31 – 20 Amp Yellow Backup Lamps
M32 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Controller, TT EUROPE
M33 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain Controller
M34 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist, Climate Control System, Head-
lamp Wash, Compass
M35 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
M36 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
M37 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake System, Electronic Stability
Control, Stop Lamp Switch, Fuel Pump Re-
lay
M38 – 25 Amp Clear Lock/Unlock Motors
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 343
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
344 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Location
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage
compartment.
NOTE: Turn the black plastic wing nut counterclockwise to
loosen the jack from the storage bin.
Spare Tire Removal
To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire
cover, if equipped, and remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench turning them counterclockwise.
NOTE: If you have added aftermarket accessories to the
spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a gross weight
of 85 lbs (38.5 kg) including the weight of the spare tire.
Jack Storage
Plastic Wing Nut Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual
transmission into REVERSE.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right
front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an auto-
matic transmission to PARK; a manual transmission
to REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored
location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack
handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
Jack Warning Label
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 347
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle.
Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
Assembled Jack And Tools Front Jacking Location
348 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
and remove the jack.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alter-
nate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications”
for correct lug nut torque.
10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper locations.
Rear Jacking Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 349
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2.
Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of
the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started
using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or
by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures
in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
(Continued)
350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION! (Continued)
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the
engine compartment, behind the Power Distribution Cen-
ter.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL)
and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Positive Battery Post
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 351
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while
making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
352 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 rpm
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and
can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested at
an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 353
CAUTION! (Continued)
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
gear selector override access cover (located to the right
of the gear selector).
4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
354 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
port, and push and hold the override release lever
down.
7. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND
GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while
gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
Gear Selector Override Access Cover
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 355
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to
restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmis-
sion and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may
also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in
the “Starting And Operating” section.
356 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating”.
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in NEU-
TRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector
Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the
automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
NOTE: For RHD Postal models, refer to the Postal Supple-
ment for towing instructions.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 357
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with
the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved
method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed
truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Four–Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer
case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK
(for automatic transmissions) or in gear ( NOT in NEU-
TRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instruc-
tions.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal dam-
age to the transmission or transfer case will occur if
a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
358 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
to the vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated tow
strap.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended
when towing the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle
damage.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 359
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................363
▫ Maintenance Plan.......................364
▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ............368
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................369
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................369
▫ Checking Oil Level .....................370
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................370
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................370
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................371
▫ Engine Oil ...........................372
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................373
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................373
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ............376
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............377
▫ Body Lubrication ......................381
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................381
▫ Exhaust System ........................386
▫ Cooling System ........................387
▫ Brake System .........................392
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...................393
▫ Transfer Case .........................394
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................394
▫ Manual Transmission ....................397
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................398
䡵 TIRES ................................398
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................398
▫ Tires
— General Information ..............407
▫ Tire Types ............................413
8
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................415
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..............416
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............418
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations ............419
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................420
▫ Treadwear ............................420
▫ Traction Grades ........................420
▫ Temperature Grades .....................420
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE ..................421
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................421
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........421
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........422
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................422
䡵 INTERIORS ............................425
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................425
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................426
▫ Leather Parts ..........................426
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................427
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Change
Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster display, “Oil
Change Required” will be displayed and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On non-instrument cluster display equipped vehicles,
“Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer
and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring
to the steps described under “Warning And Indicator
Lights” or “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and automatic transmis-
sion, and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for
the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
• Inspect all door latches for presence of grease,
reapply if necessary.
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid.
XX X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary
XXX X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
XXX X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air
filter.
XXX X X X X
Replace spark plugs ** X
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Flush and replace the engine cool-
ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter if using your vehicle
for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing.
XX
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter.
X
Change the manual transmission
fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: trailer towing, snow
plowing, heavy loading, taxi, po-
lice, delivery service (commercial
service), off-road, desert operation
or more than 50% of your driving
is at sustained high speeds during
hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
XX X X X
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change transfer case fluid if using
your vehicle for any of the follow-
ing: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
Change front and rear axle fluid if
using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
XX X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Battery 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Under Engine Cover) 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a
warmed up engine has been shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (0.95 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
bottom of the crosshatch zone will result in a reading at the
top of the crosshatch zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear
window washer (if equipped) is shared. The fluid reservoir
is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam-
mable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be
exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Gasoline Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown
in the Maintenance Schedule.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the bolts from the air cleaner intake tube.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover And Clean Air Intake Tube
1 — Spring Clips
2 — Air Hose
3 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
4 — Clean Air Intake Tube Bolts
5 — Air Cleaner Filter Cover
6 — Clean Air Intake Tube
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Remove air hose and loosen clean air hose clamp then
release the spring clips on the air intake cover.
3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Spring Clips
2 — Air Hose
3 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
Air Cleaner Air Hose
1 — Air Filter Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Hose
3 — Clean Air Intake Tube
4 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
5 — Air Cleaner Filter
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly and install air hose.
4. Tighten air intake clamp and tighten air cleaner intake
tube bolts.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other service facili-
ties using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the two air
filter access doors to the HVAC housing.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
5. Open the two air filter access doors.
6. Remove the two particulate air filters from the HVAC
air inlet housing. Pull the filter elements straight out of
the housing, one at a time.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
1 — Left Retaining Tab
2 — Right Retaining Tab
Air Filter Access Door Open
1 — Air Conditioning Filter Access Door
2 — Air Conditioning Air Filter
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
8. Close A/C Air Filter access doors and secure retaining
tabs.
9. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the follow-
ing points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2—WiperArm
3 — Release Tab
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, press
the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the
wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1—WiperBlade
2—WiperArm
3 — Release Tab
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2—WiperArm
3 — Release Tab
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm,
latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible
click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Remove the rear wiper arm pivot cap To access the
wiper arm nut.
Rear Wiper Assembly
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2—WiperArm
3 — Wiper Blade
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you
pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its
stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin
from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
3. Still grasping the wiper blade, move the wiper blade
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1—WiperArm
2—WiperBlade
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4—WiperArm
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the
end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper
arm with one hand, and apply pressure to the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
2. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
(Continued)
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION! (Continued)
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for
any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down
the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of
the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
•
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a
authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level within the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the
top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads
are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the
system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole
(A) when the vehicle is in a level position.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove the fill plug (B), then the drain plug (C). The
recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill plugs
is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When replacing the plugs, do not overtighten them.
You could damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
Transfer Case
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes
for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission seal-
ers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
at normal operating temperature (approximately 180°F/
82°C). This occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving.
At normal operating temperature, the fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips.
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Remove the engine cover by pulling it up off the
mounting studs (two in the front and two in the rear).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this
procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
engage in each position), ending with the transmission
in PARK.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if
the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
should be between the HOT (upper) reference holes on
the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the
fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube to
bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use ONLY
the specified fluid (refer to ⬙Fluids And Lubricants⬙
under “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifica-
tions). After adding any quantity of oil through the
dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil
to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking
the fluid level.
NOTE:
• The holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the
actual level is at or above the hole.
• If it is necessary to check the transmission below the
operating temperature, the fluid level should be be-
tween the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 80°F (27°C). If the fluid
level is correctly established at 80° F (27°C), it should
be between the HOT (upper) reference holes when the
transmission reaches 180° F (82°C). Remember it is best
to check the level at the normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may not
register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the
temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate
reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the
fluid.
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
8. Reinstall the engine cover and snap it down securely
onto the four mounting studs.
9. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal
for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully
seated position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Manual Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended manual transmis-
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below the
bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with water,
it should be changed immediately. Otherwise, change the
fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan. Refer to
the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance inter-
vals.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F
(7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when
checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
WARNING! (Continued)
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to
the touch.
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
CAUTION! (Continued)
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• P225/75R16 or a P235/65R17 tire with the use of a
traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S”
specification is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
Tire Rotation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the
doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause
that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your
vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s interior trim
and top, follow these precautions:
•
Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down,
as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim.
• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top
material, as damage may result.
• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on
the paint, leaving a streak.
• After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, always make
sure it is completely dry before lowering.
• Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top Win-
dows.”
Washing – Use Mopar Car Wash or equivalent, or mild
soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft bristles.
If extra cleaning is required, use Mopar Convertible Cloth
Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the
entire top, but support the top from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing
the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember to allow
the top to dry before lowering it.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force past the weather strips.
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which
can be scratched unless special care is taken by following
these directions:
1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the win-
dow, not up and down. Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window
Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic win-
dows without scratching. It removes fine scratches to
improve visibility and provides UV protection to help
prevent yellowing.
2. When washing, never use hot water or anything stron-
ger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as alcohol
or harsh cleaning agents.
3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe
with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a scraper
or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you must
clean the window quickly.
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
driving will have a major impact on zipper operation.
Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing will
eventually impact window zipper operation. To main-
tain ease of use of the window zippers, each window
zipper should be cleaned and lubricated regularly. Use
Mopar Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or
equivalent to ease zipper operation. Before applying,
make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand, mud, and
other materials. Clean both sides of the zipper, not just
one side. Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and
allow to dry. Aggressively work the Mopar Soft Top
Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the
zipper teeth. If a stuck zipper slide is experienced, work
the Mopar Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or
equivalent into the zipper slide. Several applications
may be required before the zipper comes free.
6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the
windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may
damage the windows.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........430
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................430
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .430
▫ Torque Specifications ....................431
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS....................432
▫ 3.6L Engine ...........................432
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................432
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................433
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............433
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .434
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......434
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................434
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................434
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............435
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................436
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................436
▫ Engine ..............................436
▫ Chassis .............................438
9
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number
also appears underbody, on the right side of the frame rail
near the center of the vehicle, as well as on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of
the engine block.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Vehicle Identification Number
430 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135
N·m)
1/2”x20 19mm
**Use only an authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half-
way).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 431
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of higher octane “Premium” gaso-
line will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
432 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 433
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
434 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control sys-
tem can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 435
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models 18.6 Gallons 70 Liters
Four Door Models 22.5 Gallons 85 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
10.5 Quarts 9.9 Liters
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
436 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equiva-
lent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 437
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to
use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission. We recommend Mopar ATF+4 fluid.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar Manual Transmission
Lubricant meeting the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS-9224.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant
(SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5).
Axle Differential (Rear) 226 RBI (Model 44) – We recommend you use Mopar Gear
& Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent.
For trailer towing, use Mopar Synthetic Gear & Axle
Lubricant (SAE 75W-140). Models equipped with Trac-Lok
require an additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE
J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4,
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
438 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 RADIO 130 ............................441
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ........441
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play........................443
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ...............445
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode .....447
䡵 RADIO 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO ........448
▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio .................448
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ........448
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play........................452
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ...............454
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play .......456
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play ......456
▫ Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped .....457
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect (Satellite)
Mode ...............................458
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped ............................460
䡵 RADIO 430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF
EQUIPPED ............................460
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) —
If Equipped ...........................460
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped ............................460
▫ Accessibility — If Equipped ...............460
䡵 CYBERSECURITY .......................460
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......462
▫ Radio Operation........................462
▫ CD Player ............................463
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .463
10
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE — IF EQUIPPED ........463
▫ Operation ............................465
▫ Help Command ........................466
▫ Cancel Command.......................466
▫ Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone .466
▫ Dial By Saying A Number.................467
▫ Call By Saying A Name ..................467
▫ Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone ...............468
▫ Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook .....468
▫ Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries ...........469
▫ Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry ...........469
▫ Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect Phonebook Entries .470
▫ List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook . . . .470
▫ Phone Call Features .....................471
▫ Uconnect Phone Features .................473
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .............477
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone ...............................478
▫ General Information ....................486
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .486
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........486
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED .........488
▫ Voice Command System Operation ..........488
▫ Commands ...........................489
▫ Voice Training .........................492
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............492
440 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new station until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass stations with-
out stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
radio frequency.
Radio 130
10
MULTIMEDIA 441
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save time change.
5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM
or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time
and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble
tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level
from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
442 MULTIMEDIA
AM/FM Button
Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit
to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND button. The
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select
the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and
push and release that button. If a button is not selected
within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored into
pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET
2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12
FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM sta-
tions).
DISC Button
Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label
facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display.
10
MULTIMEDIA 443
If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 inch (2.5 cm),
a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a
new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Radio 130 is a single CD player. Do not attempt
to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other
side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause
damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
ten seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
SEEK Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the
current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK button
will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and
MP3 modes.
444 MULTIMEDIA
TIME Button
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW
or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button
operates in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When
reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly
and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and
Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
the file name and folder name, and will assign a number
10
MULTIMEDIA 445
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed-
ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an
MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR
bit rate.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
446 MULTIMEDIA
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio
checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot
of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start
playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by
the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to
load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase
with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to
use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3
player, or iPod, and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not
loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
10
MULTIMEDIA 447
RADIO 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
SiriusXM Satellite Radio gives you over 130 channels,
including 100% commercial-free music from nearly every
genre, plus all your favorite sports, news, talk and enter-
tainment channels – all with crystal clear, coast-to-coast
coverage, all in one place and all at your fingertips.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push the SAT button
on the faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new station until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass stations with-
out stopping, until you release it.
Radio 130
448 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Multimedia”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone — If
Equipped
Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature (if
equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect Phone — If Equipped
Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature (if
equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with, or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save time change.
5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
INFO Button
Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM
or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
10
MULTIMEDIA 449
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time
and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble
tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level
from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five sec-
onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type
information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
450 MULTIMEDIA
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited
and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pushing the SELECT button will allow you
to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, push
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The
minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the
right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Push the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit
to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND button. The
10
MULTIMEDIA 451
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select
the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and
push and release that button. If a button is not selected
within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored into
pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET
2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12
FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM sta-
tions).
DISC/AUX Button
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label
facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display.
If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 inch (2.5 cm),
a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a
new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
452 MULTIMEDIA
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Radio 130 is a single CD player. Do not attempt
to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other
side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause
damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
ten seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
SEEK Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the
current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK button
will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and
MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW
or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button
operates in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
10
MULTIMEDIA 453
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When
reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly
and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and
Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
the file name and folder name, and will assign a number
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed-
ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
454 MULTIMEDIA
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an
MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR
bit rate.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio
checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot
of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start
playing the MP3 files.
10
MULTIMEDIA 455
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by
the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to
load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase
with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to
use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before
writing to the disc.
LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on
the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by
pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin play-
ing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the
following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name,
and Folder Name (if available).
Push the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more
and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to
return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3
player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the
source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
456 MULTIMEDIA
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition
is OFF).
Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting
technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast.
The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio.
This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports,
news, entertainment, and programming for children, di-
rectly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may
begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome
kit that contains general information, including how to
setup your online listening account. For further informa-
tion, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the
Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at
www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position
and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected.
Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID
number will display. The Sirius ID number display will
time out in two minutes. Push any button on the radio to
exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect (Satellite) Mode
Push the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
10
MULTIMEDIA 457
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes
should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the
loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on
or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking struc-
ture or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form
of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause
signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect (Satellite)
Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new station until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass stations with-
out stopping, until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the
next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing
to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN button a
second time.
INFO Button
Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an
458 MULTIMEDIA
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return to
normal display).
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five sec-
onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type function
is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with
the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited
and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the follow-
ing items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/SELECT
button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is
used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius sub-
scription.
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit
to push button memory, push the SET button. The symbol
SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the
button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and push
and release that button. If a button is not selected within
five seconds after pushing the SET button, the channel will
continue to play but will not be stored into push button
memory.
You may add a second channel to each push button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
10
MULTIMEDIA 459
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push
button memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can
be selected by pushing the push button twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia”.
RADIO 430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF
EQUIPPED
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Multimedia” for further
details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia” for further
details.
Accessibility — If Equipped
The accessibility feature announces DVD functions prior to
performing them. For example, when activated, the acces-
sibility feature will announce that the “Play” button was
pressed the first time the “Play” button is pressed, and the
second time the “Play” button is pressed it will perform the
“Play” function. The accessibility feature can be turned on
and off in the settings of the radio.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
460 MULTIMEDIA
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/support/
software-update.html (U.S. Residents) or www.driveu-
connect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
10
MULTIMEDIA 461
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/CD/
HDD/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
462 MULTIMEDIA
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go
to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the player.
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port, located in the center console.
Connecting an electronic audio device to the AUX port
located in the radio faceplate plays media, but does not use
the control feature to control the connected device.
If the radio has a USB port, refer to your User Guide or the
appropriate Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
external USB device support capability.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning could
result in a collision.
UCONNECT PHONE — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone* using
simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ “Work” or
“Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s audio is
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the sys-
tem automatically mutes your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth “Hands-Free Profile,” Version
0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect website for supported
phones. For Uconnect customer support:
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week).
• Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
10
MULTIMEDIA 463
• Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
• Sun., Closed
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other with-
out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works
no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect Phone.
The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
related to the use of the Uconnect features and appli-
cations in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Uconnect Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect Phone
button and Voice Com-
mand button) that enables you to access the
system. When you push the button you hear the word
Uconnect followed by a BEEP. The beep is your signal to
give a command.
NOTE: The driver side upper windshield trim contains the
microphone for the Uconnect Phone.
Voice Command Button
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws.
Your attention should be focused on safely operating
(Continued)
464 MULTIMEDIA
WARNING! (Continued)
the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Actual button location may vary with the radio.
The individual buttons are described in the “Op-
eration” section.
The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone. See the Uconnect
website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service
provider or the phone manufacturer for details.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from
the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
equipped.
The Uconnect display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on certain
radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Phone Pairing,” the following compound command
can be said: “Setup Phone Pairing.”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You can
also break the commands into parts and say each part of
the command when you are asked for it. For example,
you can use the compound form voice command
“Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the com-
pound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
10
MULTIMEDIA 465
Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a
few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at
any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone
button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a
push of the Phone
button on the faceplate.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few
instances the system will take you back to the previous
menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect web-
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pair-
ing instructions:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Phone” and
follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifi-
cation Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter
into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit
PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the
initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone.
Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a
unique phone name.
466 MULTIMEDIA
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being the
highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones
to your Uconnect Phone. However, at any given time,
only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your
Uconnect System. The priority allows the Uconnect
Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple
mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For
example, if priority three and priority five phones are
present in the vehicle, the Uconnect Phone will use the
priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You
can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any
time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this
section).
NOTE: Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first,
make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on
your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth settings.
Dial By Saying A Number
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial.”
• The system will prompt you to say the number you want
to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
• The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display of
certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.”
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previously
stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or down-
loaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the
phonebook, refer to “Add Names To Your Uconnect
Phonebook,” in this section.
• The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may ap-
pear in the display of certain radios.
10
MULTIMEDIA 467
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website for supported phones.
• To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect) Phone-
book, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name”
section.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start
the vehicle.
• A maximum of 1,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
the previous downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or de-
leted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited
on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connec-
tion.
Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob.”
468 MULTIMEDIA
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry,
if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the phone-
book entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to add more phone
numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu.
The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names
in the phonebook with each name having up to four
associated phone numbers and designations. Each lan-
guage has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only
in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported
by your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically downloads
your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit.”
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
NOTE:
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when
the vehicle is not in motion.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the phone-
book. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile
and a home number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work
number later using the “Phonebook Edit” feature.
Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when
the vehicle is not in motion.
10
MULTIMEDIA 469
To delete a Uconnect phonebook entry using Voice Com-
mands:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete.”
3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to
delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete, or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries from
the list, push the Voice Command
button while the
Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete.”
4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect Phone will ask
you which designation you wish to delete: home, work,
mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you wish to
delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
NOTE: Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot
be deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
• ONLY the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
To delete or erase all Uconnect phonebook entries using
Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All.”
• The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
3. After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted.
List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names.”
470 MULTIMEDIA
• The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
• To call one of the names in the list, push the Voice
Command
button during the playing of the desired
name, and say “Call.”
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
• The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be ac-
cessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if
on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Push
the Phone
button to accept the call. To reject the call,
push and hold the Phone button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was re-
jected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Push the Phone
button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
push the Voice Command
button and say “Dial” or
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. To go back to the
10
MULTIMEDIA 471
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference Call”
in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, push the Phone
button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
Phone
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
push the Phone
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold):
1. Push and hold the Phone
button until you hear a
double beep, indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice Command
button while a call is in progress, and make a second
phone call, as described under “Making a Second Call
While Current Call is in Progress.” After the second call
has established, push and hold the Phone
button
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two
calls have been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress:
1. Momentarily push the Phone
button.
• Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is
a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent.
2. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
Phone
button until you hear a single beep.
472 MULTIMEDIA
Redial
To redial the last number called from your mobile phone
using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial.”
• The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available
on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
1. After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends, or until
the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the
call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the
mobile phone.
2. After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue on
the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration, after which
the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect
Phone to the mobile phone.
3. An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile
phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
Uconnect Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to English,
Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice
commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook
is usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
10
MULTIMEDIA 473
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the
paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, push the Phone
button and
say “Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of
successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency,
your mobile phone must be:
• Turned on.
• Paired to the Uconnect System.
• Have network coverage.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance.”
NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assistance
phone number using the Voice Command system. To do
this, push the Phone
button and say “Setup,” fol-
lowed by “Towing Assistance.” When prompted say
1-800-521-2779 for U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada, 55-
14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico.
474 MULTIMEDIA
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working With Automated
Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work
properly with the Uconnect Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
With Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service or
automated customer service line. Some services require
immediate response selection. In some instances, that may
be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on
your mobile phone keypad, you can push the Voice Com-
mand
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
followed by the word “Send.” For example, if required
to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),you
can push the Voice Command
button and say, “3 7 4
6 # Send.” Saying a number, or sequence of numbers,
followed by “Send,” is also to be used for navigating
through an automated customer service center menu
structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect Phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call
and then push the Voice Command
button and say,
“Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the name
or number and say the name of the phonebook entry
you wish to send. The Uconnect Phone will then send
the corresponding phone number associated with the
phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the use
of this feature.
10
MULTIMEDIA 475
Barge In – Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you wish
to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command
immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking “Would
you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you could push the
Voice Command
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
To turn confirmation prompts on or off using Voice Com-
mand:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say:
• “Setup Confirmations Prompts On”
• “Setup Confirmations Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such
as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your
mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will provide notifica-
tion to inform you of your phone and network status when
you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect
Phone. The status is given for roaming, network signal
strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing via
the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution
and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a
number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone, the
audio will be played through your vehicles audio system.
The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the
number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that
the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
476 MULTIMEDIA
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be able
to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but
the other party will not be able to hear you. To mute the
Uconnect Phone:
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
To un-mute the Uconnect Phone:
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred
from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your
Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect
Phone or vice versa, push the Voice Command
button
and say “Transfer Call.”
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect
Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone user manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, say “List Phones.”
• The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
being announced, push the Voice Command
button
and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two
sections for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
paired phone.
10
MULTIMEDIA 477
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect Phone.
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• You can also push the Voice Command
button at any
time while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone call.
If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect
Phone will return to using the highest priority phone
present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m) of
the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
• You can also push the Voice Command
button at any
time while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
Uconnect Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the
Phone
button and say “Uconnect Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz-
ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect Phone
Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training
mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
• From outside the Uconnect Phone mode (e.g., from radio
mode), push and hold the Voice Command
button
for five seconds until the session begins, or,
• Push the Voice Command
button and say the “Voice
Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice Train-
ing” command.
You can either push the Uconnect Phone button to restore
the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when
prompted by the Uconnect Phone. For best results, the
478 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Training session should be completed when the
vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows
closed, and the blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
To Reset all settings using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
• This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System
will prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
For best performance:
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch (1
cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and
the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during
a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather condition
NOTE:
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents,
the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such as
voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 479
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not
in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are
not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must be
spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing num-
ber combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather conditions
• Operation from the driver’s seat
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect Phone
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load,” Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming
and Missed Calls.
SMS
Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your
phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect Phone, an announcement will be
made to notify you that you have a new text message. If
you wish to hear the new message:
1. Push the Phone
button.
480 MULTIMEDIA
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
• Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect Phone.
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect Phone. To send a
new message:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
3. You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, push the Voice Command
button
while the system is listing the message and say “Send.”
Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction
5. L O L
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
10
MULTIMEDIA 481
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on.
Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth
ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
Voice Tree Main Menu
482 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Tree Phonebook
10
MULTIMEDIA 483
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
Primary Alternate (s)
three
four
five
six
Voice Tree Setup
484 MULTIMEDIA
Primary Alternate (s)
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Primary Alternate (s)
Francais
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu return or main menu
10
MULTIMEDIA 485
Primary Alternate (s)
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
486 MULTIMEDIA
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
10
MULTIMEDIA 487
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
USB mass storage class device, iPod family of
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device, sat-
ellite radio, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice
Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be
negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice
level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws.
Your attention should be focused on safely operating
the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
When you push the Voice Command
button, you will
hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few seconds,
the system will present you with a list of options.
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists
options, push the Voice Command
button, listen for
the beep, and say your command.
Pushing the Voice Command
button while the system
is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system will be
interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or change
commands. This will become helpful once you start to
learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a
normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows
are closed, and the heater/air conditioning blower is set to
low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
488 MULTIMEDIA
To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Command
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands.
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
active.
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
but-
ton.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume set-
ting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
but-
ton. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth Stream-
ing mode)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
10
MULTIMEDIA 489
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite Radio.”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken
number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you may
say the following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
Bluetooth Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to Bluetooth Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Play” (to play the current track)
• “Pause” (to pause the current track)
490 MULTIMEDIA
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
Memo Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may push the Voice Command
but-
ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may push the Voice Command
button to stop playing memos. You proceed by
saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
• “Change to setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
• “Main menu setup”
• “Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
• “Tutorial”
• “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep before
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
10
MULTIMEDIA 491
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz-
ing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice
“Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Push the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the
system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a
new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice
only.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
492 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................494
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............494
▫ Prepare A List .........................494
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............494
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................494
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............495
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........495
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................495
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........495
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................495
▫ Service Contract .......................496
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............497
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................497
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............497
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .497
▫ In Canada ............................497
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............498
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
494 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 495
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
496 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 497
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
498 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
About Your Brakes .........................430
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............389
Adding Fuel ..............................303
Additives, Fuel ............................433
AirBag .................................240
Advance Front Air Bag ....................240
Air Bag Operation ........................242
Air Bag Warning Light .....................239
Enhanced Accident Response .............247, 359
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................359
FrontAirBag ...........................240
If Deployment Occurs .....................245
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................242
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............248
Maintenance ............................248
Transporting Pets ........................268
Air Bag Light.......................191, 239, 270
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......373
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................377
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ................377, 378
Air Conditioner System ......................377
Air Conditioning Filter ....................69, 379
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ................67
Air Conditioning System ......................67
Air Filter ................................373
Air Pressure
Tires..................................409
Alarm
Security Alarm ..........................194
Alarm (Security Alarm) .......................25
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .................................6
Antenna, Satellite Radio ......................458
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................388, 436
Disposal ...............................391
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................204
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................194
Arming System (Security Alarm) ................26
Assistance Towing ..........................474
Assist, Hill Start ...........................206
Automatic
Dimming Mirror ....................49
Automatic Headlights ........................52
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............67
Automatic Transmission ..................285, 397
Adding Fluid ...........................397
Fluid And Filter Changes ...................397
Fluid Change ...........................397
Fluid Level Check .....................394, 395
Fluid Type ..........................394, 438
Special Additives .........................395
500 INDEX
Autostick ................................290
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .........172
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................172
Axle Fluid ...............................438
Axle Lock ................................296
Battery...............................193, 370
Charging System Light ....................193
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................18
Belts, Seat ................................270
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................381
B-Pillar Location ...........................404
Brake Assist System .........................206
Brake Control System, Electronic................205
Brake Fluid ...........................392, 438
Brake System ..........................392, 430
Anti-Lock (ABS) .........................430
Fluid Check ............................392
Master Cylinder .........................392
Parking ...............................278
Warning Light ...........................191
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................285
Bulb Replacement .......................334, 335
Bulbs, Light ...........................272, 334
Calibration, Compass........................185
Capacities, Fluid ...........................436
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..................................303
Oil (Engine) ............................369
Power Steering ..........................299
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................390
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................269, 435
Cargo Light ...............................55
Car Washes...............................422
Cellular Phone .........................463, 486
Center High Mounted Stop Light ...............338
Certification Label ..........................304
Chains, Tir
e ..............................418
Changing A Flat Tire ........................398
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................400
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .200
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............268
Checks, Safety.............................268
Child Restraint ............................249
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................253
Child Seat Installation .....................265
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........262
Infant And Child Restraints .................251
12
INDEX 501
LATCH Positions .........................256
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............259
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......255
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........252
Seating Positions .........................254
Child Safety Locks ..........................29
Clean Air Gasoline .........................432
Cleaning
Wheels ................................416
Climate Control ............................59
Clock................................442, 449
Cold Weather Operation......................276
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................492
Compact Spare Tire .........................415
Compass.................................184
Compass Calibration ........................185
Compass Variance ..........................186
Connector
UCI ..................................463
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ...........463
Console .................................170
Console, Floor .............................170
Contract, Service ...........................496
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............390
Cooling System ............................387
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................389
Coolant Capacity .........................436
Coolant Level ...........................391
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................391
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................388
Inspection ..........................388, 391
Points To Remember ......................391
Pressure Cap ............................390
Radiator Cap ...........................390
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........388, 436
Corrosion Protection ........................421
Customer Assistance ........................494
Cybersecurity .............................460
Daytime Running Lights ......................
52
Dealer Service .............................371
Defroster, Windshield........................270
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ....................57
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................199
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ...............................52
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................370
Power Steering ..........................299
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................356
502 INDEX
Disarming, Security System ....................26
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................391
Door Locks................................27
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors .......29
Doors....................................27
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................36
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................37
Driving..................................321
Dual Top...............................71, 74
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........172
Electrical Power Outlets ......................172
Electric Brake Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................204
Electronic Roll Mitigation ...............208, 214
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................51
Electronic Brake Control System ................205
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........299
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............208
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........193
Emergency Brake...........................278
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking ............................344, 398
Jump Starting ...........................350
Tow Hooks .............................359
Emission Control System Maintenance............200
Engine ..................................369
Air Cleaner .............................373
Block Heater ............................277
Break-In Recommendations .................278
Compartment ...........................369
Compartment Identification .................369
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................436
Cooling ...............................387
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................269, 435
Fails To Start ............................276
Flooded, Starting .........................276
Fuel Requirements ........................436
Jump Starting ...........................350
Oil
...............................372, 436
Oil Filler Cap ...........................369
Oil Filter ...............................373
Oil Selection .........................372, 436
Oil Synthetic ............................373
Overheating ............................353
Starting ...............................275
Engine Oil Viscosity.........................372
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................372
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........247, 359
12
INDEX 503
Ethanol..................................433
Exhaust Gas Caution ........................269
Exhaust Gas Cautions .......................435
Exhaust System ........................269, 386
Exterior Lights ..........................52, 272
Fabric Care ...............................423
Fabric Top ...............................423
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................373
Air Conditioning ......................69, 379
Engine Oil ..........................373, 436
Engine Oil Disposal .......................373
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................334
Turn Signal ......................272, 336, 337
Turn Signals ............................198
Flash-To-Pass ..............................52
Flooded Engine Starting ......................276
Fluid, Brake ..............................438
Fluid Capacities............................436
Fluid Leaks...............................272
Fluid Level Checks .........................393
Brake .................................392
Engine Oil .............................370
Manual Transmission ......................397
Power Steering ..........................299
Fluids And Lubricants .......................436
Fog Lights .............................53, 337
Fog Light Service...........................337
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat ....................44
Fold-Flat Seats .............................36
Folding Rear Seat ...........................38
Folding Windshield .........................162
Four-Way Hazard Flasher.....................334
Four Wheel Drive ..........................292
Operation ..............................292
Shifting ...............................292
Systems ...............................292
Four Wheel Drive
Operation ..................292
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................355
Front Axle (Differential) ......................393
Fuel ....................................432
Adding ...............................303
Additives ..............................433
Clean Air ..............................432
Ethanol ...............................433
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ......................303
Gasoline ...............................432
Materials Added .........................433
504 INDEX
Methanol ..............................433
Octane Rating ........................432, 436
Requirements ...........................436
Specifications ...........................436
Tank Capacity ...........................436
Fueling..................................303
Fuses ...................................338
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ..............200, 303, 304
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................432
Gasoline (Fuel) ............................432
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................432
Gear Ranges...........................282, 286
Gear Select Lever Override....................354
General Information.........................486
Glass Cleaning ............................427
Gross Axle Weight Rating.....................307
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................307
GVWR ..................................305
Hands-Free Phone
Uconnect ..............................463
HardTop.................................81
Hard Top, Modular ..........................81
Hard Top Removal ..........................88
Hazard Warning Flasher......................334
Headlights
Automatic ..............................52
Bulb Replacement ........................335
Cleaning ...............................422
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........52
Passing ................................52
Replacing ..............................335
Switch .................................52
Head Restraints ............................45
Heated Mirrors .............................51
Heated Seats...............................38
Heater, Engine Block ........................277
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ......52
Hill Descent Control ........................215
Hill Descent Control Indicator .................215
Hill Start Assist ............................206
Hitches
Trailer T
owing ...........................309
Hood Prop ...............................168
Hood Release .............................168
Ignition ..................................19
Switch .................................19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................23
12
INDEX 505
Information Center, Vehicle ...................181
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................49
Instrument Cluster..........................178
Descriptions ............................198
Menu Items ............................184
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................426
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ...............339
Interior And Instrument Lights..................54
Interior Appearance Care .....................425
Interior Lights..............................54
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............57
Introduction ................................4
Inverter, Power ............................176
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio .................490
Jacking Instructions .........................346
Jack Location .............................345
Jack Operation ......................346, 347, 398
Jump Starting .............................350
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....18
Key, Programming ..........................24
Key, Replacement ...........................24
Keys ....................................17
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)......................23
Lane Change Assist ..........................54
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................229
Latches..................................272
Hood .................................168
Leaks, Fluid ..............................272
Life Of Tires ..............................412
Light Bulbs ...........................272, 334
Lights...................................272
AirBag.........................191, 239, 270
Automatic Headlights ......................52
Back-Up ...............................337
Brake Assist Warning ......................213
Brake Warning ..........................191
Bulb Replacement .....................334, 335
Cargo .................................55
Center Mounted Stop ......................338
Cruise ................................198
Daytime Running .........................
52
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...................52
Exterior ...............................272
Fog................................53, 337
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................334
Headlights ...........................52, 335
506 INDEX
Headlight Switch .........................52
High Beam ..............................52
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................52
Hill Descent Control Indicator ...............215
Instrument Cluster ........................52
Interior ................................54
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........195
Passing ................................52
Rear Servicing ...........................337
Rear Tail Lamps .........................337
Seat Belt Reminder .......................194
Security Alarm ..........................194
Service .............................334, 335
Side Marker ............................337
Traction Control .........................213
Turn Signal ....................53, 272, 336, 337
Turn Signals ............................198
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........198
Loading Vehicle............................304
Tires..................................404
Locking Axle..............................296
Locks
Child Protection ..........................29
Door ..................................27
Power Door .............................29
Lubrication, Body ..........................381
Lug Nuts ................................430
Maintenance Free Battery .....................370
Maintenance Schedule .......................363
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .195, 200
Manual, Service............................498
Manual Transmission ....................280, 397
Fluid Level Check ........................397
Lubricant Selection ....................397, 438
Shift Speeds ............................282
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ................36
Memory Seat ..............................36
Memory Seats And Radio .....................36
Methanol ................................433
Mirrors ..................................49
Automatic
Dimming .......................49
Electric Powered ..........................51
Electric Remote ...........................51
Heated .................................51
Outside ................................50
Rearview ...............................49
Vanity .................................51
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .................................6
12
INDEX 507
Modular Hard Top ..........................81
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................217
Mopar Parts ..............................497
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................278
Occupant Restraints.........................226
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............432, 436
Oil, Engine............................372, 436
Capacity ...............................436
Change Interval .........................372
Dipstick ...............................370
Disposal ...............................373
Filter ..............................373, 436
Filter Disposal ...........................373
Identification Logo .......................372
Materials Added To .......................373
Pressure Warning Light ....................193
Recommendation .....................372, 436
Synthetic ..............................373
Viscosity ...........................372, 436
Oil Filter, Change ..........................373
Oil Filter, Selection..........................373
Oil Pressure Light ..........................193
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................199
Operating Precautions .......................199
Operator Manual
Owner’s Manual ...........................6
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................50
Overdrive ................................290
Overdrive OFF Switch .......................290
Overheating, Engine ........................353
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .............498
Paint Care................................421
Parking Brake .............................278
Personal Settings ...........................188
Pets ....................................268
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) .................463
Placard, T
ire And Loading Information ...........404
Power
Brakes ................................430
Door Locks ..............................29
Inverter ...............................176
Mirrors ................................51
Steering ............................298, 299
Windows ...............................70
Power Steering Fluid ........................438
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................235
Preparation For Jacking ......................346
508 INDEX
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................236
Programmable Electronic Features...............188
Radial Ply Tires ............................410
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............390
Radio 130
Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode .........447
Operating Instructions Radio Mode ............441
Radio 130 With Satellite Radio
Multimedia Satellite Radio ..................457
Operating Instructions Radio Mode ............448
Radio Frequency
General Information ..................19, 23, 25
Radio Operation ...........................486
Rear Axle (Differential) ......................393
Rear Swing Gate ...........................169
Rear Wiper/Washer..........................58
Recreational Towing.........................318
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .........319
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .......320
Reformulated Gasoline.......................432
Refrigerant ...............................378
Release, Hood .............................168
Reminder, Seat Belt .........................228
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls...........462
Remote Starting System .......................20
Replacement Bulbs .........................334
Replacement Keys ...........................24
Replacement Tires ..........................412
Reporting Safety Defects .....................497
Restraints, Child ...........................249
Restraints, Head ............................45
Roll Over Warning ...........................5
Rotation, Tires.............................419
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle...................270
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................272
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................497
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................269
Safety Information, T
ire ......................398
Safety Tips ...............................268
Satellite Radio Antenna ......................458
Satellite Radio (Uconnect Studios) ...............448
Schedule, Maintenance.......................363
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......234
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........236
12
INDEX 509
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................231
Seat Belt Maintenance .......................425
Seat Belt Reminder .........................194
Seat Belts .............................227, 270
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................234
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........234
Child Restraints .........................249
Energy Management Feature ................236
Extender ...............................235
Front Seat .......................227, 229, 231
Inspection ..............................270
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................229
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............233
Operating Instructions .....................231
Pregnant Women .........................235
Pretensioners ...........................236
Rear Seat ..............................229
Reminder ..............................228
Seat Belt Extender ........................235
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................236
Untwisting Procedure .....................233
Seats ....................................36
Adjustment .............................36
Easy Entry ..............................40
Fold And Tumble Rear .....................44
Heated .................................38
Height Adjustment ........................37
Rear Folding ..........................36, 38
Removal ...............................45
Seatback Release ..........................37
Tilting ...............................36, 37
Security Alarm ..........................25, 194
Security System ............................25
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............436
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................23
Sentry Key Programming......................24
Sentry Key Replacement ......................24
Service Assistance ..........................494
Service Contract ...........................496
Service Manuals ...........................498
Settings,
Personal ..........................188
Setting The Clock .......................442, 449
Shifting .................................284
Automatic Transmission ....................284
Manual Transmission ......................280
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral
(N)...................................319
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral
(N)...................................320
Shift Lever Override ........................354
510 INDEX
Shoulder Belts.............................229
Signals, Turn .................53, 198, 272, 336, 337
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................418
Snow Tires ...............................414
Soft Top...............................98, 129
Spare Tire ................................345
Spare Tires ............................415, 416
Spark Plugs ..............................436
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................436
Oil...................................436
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ............................302
Cancel ................................302
Resume ...............................302
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................299
Starting ...............................20, 275
Automatic Transmission ....................275
Button .................................19
Cold Weather ...........................276
Engine Block Heater ......................277
Engine Fails To Start ......................276
Manual Transmission ......................275
Remote ................................20
Starting And Operating ......................275
Starting Procedures .........................275
Steering ..................................48
Power .............................298, 299
Tilt Column .............................48
Wheel, Tilt ..............................48
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................462
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .462
Storage, Behind the Seat......................171
Storage, Vehicle .........................68, 421
Storing Your Vehicle ........................421
Stuck, Freeing .............................355
Sunrider..............................126, 160
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag ..........240
Sway Bar Disconnect,
Electronic ................296
Sway Control, Trailer ........................214
Swing Gate, Rear...........................169
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................373
System, Remote Starting ......................20
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............67
Tilt Steering Column .........................48
Tire And Loading Information Placard............404
Tire Markings .............................398
Tires..........................272, 407, 415, 420
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................412
12
INDEX 511
Air Pressure ............................407
Chains ................................418
Changing ...........................344, 398
Compact Spare ..........................415
General Information ...................407, 415
High Speed .............................409
Inflation Pressure ........................409
Jacking ............................347, 398
Life Of Tires ............................412
Load Capacity .......................404, 405
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...........196
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .............217
Quality Grading .........................420
Radial ................................410
Replacement ............................412
Rotation ...............................419
Safety .............................398, 407
Sizes .................................400
Snow Tires .............................414
Spare Tire ..............................345
Spare Tires ..........................415, 416
Spinning ...............................411
Tread Wear Indicators .....................411
Wheel Nut Torque ........................430
Tire Safety Information.......................398
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................313
To Open Hood ............................168
Tow Hooks, Emergency ......................359
Towing ...........................306, 310, 356
24-Hour Towing Assistance .................474
Disabled Vehicle .........................356
Recreational ............................318
Weight ................................310
Towing Assistance ..........................474
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ............318
Trac-Lok Rear
Axle .........................295
Traction Control ...........................208
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ....................214
Trailer Towing.............................306
Cooling System Tips ......................317
Hitches ................................309
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............310, 313
Wiring ................................315
Trailer Towing Guide ........................310
Trailer Weight .............................310
Transaxle
Autostick ..............................290
Transfer Case .............................394
Fluid .................................438
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation ................292
512 INDEX
Maintenance ............................394
Transmission
Automatic ..........................285, 394
Fluid .................................438
Maintenance ............................394
Manual ................................280
Shifting ...............................284
Transporting Pets ..........................268
Tread Wear Indicators .......................411
Turn Signals .....................53, 198, 336, 337
UCI Connector ............................463
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity ...............477
Phone Call Features .......................471
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)..................463
Uconnect Phone ...........................473
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................420
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector .....463
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................233
Vanity Mirrors .............................51
Variance, Compass..........................186
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............430
Vehicle Loading ........................304, 405
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................6
Vehicle Storage..........................68, 421
Viscosity, Engine Oil ........................372
Voice Command
Commands .............................489
System Operation ........................488
Voice Training ...........................492
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................488
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .195
Warnings And Cautions .......................6
Warnings, Roll Over ..........................5
Warranty Information .......................497
Washers, Windshield ........................370
Washing Vehicle ...........................422
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................416
Wheel And Wheel
Tire Trim ...................416
Wind Buffeting .............................71
Window Fogging ...........................68
Windows
Power .................................70
Windshield Defroster ........................270
Windshield, Folding.........................162
Windshield Washers ......................56, 370
Fluid .................................370
12
INDEX 513
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
DID_3636160_18d_Jeep_Wrangler_OM_EN_070318.indd 2 7/3/2018 9:23:33 AM
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fourth Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
18JK-126-AD
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2018
Wrangler JK
2018
Wrangler JK
DID_3636160_18d_Jeep_Wrangler_OM_EN_070318.indd 1 7/3/2018 9:23:33 AM
